Add support for Andes NDS32:
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
1 \input texinfo
2 @setfilename ld.info
3 @c Copyright 1991-2013 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
4 @syncodeindex ky cp
5 @c man begin INCLUDE
6 @include configdoc.texi
7 @c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
8 @include bfdver.texi
9 @c man end
10
11 @c @smallbook
12
13 @macro gcctabopt{body}
14 @code{\body\}
15 @end macro
16
17 @c man begin NAME
18 @ifset man
19 @c Configure for the generation of man pages
20 @set UsesEnvVars
21 @set GENERIC
22 @set ARM
23 @set C6X
24 @set H8300
25 @set HPPA
26 @set I960
27 @set M68HC11
28 @set M68K
29 @set MIPS
30 @set MMIX
31 @set MSP430
32 @set NDS32
33 @set POWERPC
34 @set POWERPC64
35 @set Renesas
36 @set SPU
37 @set TICOFF
38 @set WIN32
39 @set XTENSA
40 @end ifset
41 @c man end
42
43 @ifnottex
44 @dircategory Software development
45 @direntry
46 * Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
47 @end direntry
48 @end ifnottex
49
50 @copying
51 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
52 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
53 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
54 @end ifset
55 version @value{VERSION}.
56
57 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2013 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
58
59 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
60 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
61 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
62 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
63 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
64 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
65 @end copying
66 @iftex
67 @finalout
68 @setchapternewpage odd
69 @settitle The GNU linker
70 @titlepage
71 @title The GNU linker
72 @sp 1
73 @subtitle @code{ld}
74 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
75 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
76 @end ifset
77 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
78 @author Steve Chamberlain
79 @author Ian Lance Taylor
80 @page
81
82 @tex
83 {\parskip=0pt
84 \hfill Red Hat Inc\par
85 \hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
86 \hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
87 \hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
88 }
89 \global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
90 @end tex
91
92 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
93 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
94 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2013 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
95
96 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
97 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
98 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
99 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
100 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
101 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
102 @c man end
103
104 @end titlepage
105 @end iftex
106 @contents
107 @c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
108
109 @ifnottex
110 @node Top
111 @top LD
112 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
113 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
114 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
115 @end ifset
116 version @value{VERSION}.
117
118 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
119 Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
120 in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
121
122 @menu
123 * Overview:: Overview
124 * Invocation:: Invocation
125 * Scripts:: Linker Scripts
126 @ifset GENERIC
127 * Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
128 @end ifset
129 @ifclear GENERIC
130 @ifset H8300
131 * H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
132 @end ifset
133 @ifset Renesas
134 * Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
135 @end ifset
136 @ifset I960
137 * i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
138 @end ifset
139 @ifset ARM
140 * ARM:: ld and the ARM family
141 @end ifset
142 @ifset M68HC11
143 * M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
144 @end ifset
145 @ifset HPPA
146 * HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
147 @end ifset
148 @ifset M68K
149 * M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
150 @end ifset
151 @ifset MIPS
152 * MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
153 @end ifset
154 @ifset POWERPC
155 * PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
156 @end ifset
157 @ifset POWERPC64
158 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
159 @end ifset
160 @ifset SPU
161 * SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
162 @end ifset
163 @ifset TICOFF
164 * TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
165 @end ifset
166 @ifset WIN32
167 * Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
168 @end ifset
169 @ifset XTENSA
170 * Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
171 @end ifset
172 @end ifclear
173 @ifclear SingleFormat
174 * BFD:: BFD
175 @end ifclear
176 @c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
177
178 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
179 * MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
180 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
181 * LD Index:: LD Index
182 @end menu
183 @end ifnottex
184
185 @node Overview
186 @chapter Overview
187
188 @cindex @sc{gnu} linker
189 @cindex what is this?
190
191 @ifset man
192 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
193 ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
194 @c man end
195
196 @c man begin SEEALSO
197 ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
198 the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
199 @file{ld}.
200 @c man end
201 @end ifset
202
203 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
204
205 @command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
206 their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
207 compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
208
209 @command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
210 a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
211 to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
212
213 @ifset man
214 @c For the man only
215 This man page does not describe the command language; see the
216 @command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
217 language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
218 @end ifset
219
220 @ifclear SingleFormat
221 This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
222 to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
223 write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
224 @code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
225 available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
226 @end ifclear
227
228 Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
229 linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
230 execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
231 @command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
232 (or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
233
234 @c man end
235
236 @node Invocation
237 @chapter Invocation
238
239 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
240
241 The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
242 and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
243 you have many choices to control its behavior.
244
245 @c man end
246
247 @ifset UsesEnvVars
248 @menu
249 * Options:: Command Line Options
250 * Environment:: Environment Variables
251 @end menu
252
253 @node Options
254 @section Command Line Options
255 @end ifset
256
257 @cindex command line
258 @cindex options
259
260 @c man begin OPTIONS
261
262 The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
263 practice few of them are used in any particular context.
264 @cindex standard Unix system
265 For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
266 object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
267 link a file @code{hello.o}:
268
269 @smallexample
270 ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
271 @end smallexample
272
273 This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
274 result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
275 the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
276 directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
277
278 Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
279 point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
280 as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
281 which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
282 files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
283 different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
284 occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
285 option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
286 noted in the descriptions below.
287
288 @cindex object files
289 Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
290 together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
291 options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
292 an option and its argument.
293
294 Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
295 specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
296 and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
297 are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
298 message @samp{No input files}.
299
300 If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
301 assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
302 augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
303 linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
304 permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
305 or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
306 @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
307 script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
308 extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
309 to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
310 the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
311
312 For options whose names are a single letter,
313 option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
314 whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
315 option that requires them.
316
317 For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
318 precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
319 @samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
320 this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
321 only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
322 @samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
323 name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
324 output.
325
326 Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
327 option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
328 immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
329 @samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
330 Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
331 accepted.
332
333 Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
334 (e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
335 prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
336 compiler driver) like this:
337
338 @smallexample
339 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
340 @end smallexample
341
342 This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
343 silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
344 may also arise when passing options that require values through a
345 driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
346 a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
347 and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
348 the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
349
350 @smallexample
351 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
352 @end smallexample
353
354 Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
355 linker:
356
357 @table @gcctabopt
358 @include at-file.texi
359
360 @kindex -a @var{keyword}
361 @item -a @var{keyword}
362 This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
363 argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
364 @samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
365 @samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
366 to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
367
368 @kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
369 @item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
370 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
371 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
372 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
373 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
374 finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
375 it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
376 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
377 interface.
378
379 @ifset I960
380 @cindex architectures
381 @kindex -A @var{arch}
382 @item -A @var{architecture}
383 @kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
384 @itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
385 In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
386 Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
387 @var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
388 the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
389 archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
390 family}, for details.
391
392 Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
393 other architecture families.
394 @end ifset
395
396 @ifclear SingleFormat
397 @cindex binary input format
398 @kindex -b @var{format}
399 @kindex --format=@var{format}
400 @cindex input format
401 @cindex input format
402 @item -b @var{input-format}
403 @itemx --format=@var{input-format}
404 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
405 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
406 @samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
407 that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
408 configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
409 to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
410 default input format the most usual format on each machine.
411 @var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
412 supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
413 formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
414 @xref{BFD}.
415
416 You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
417 binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
418 linking object files of different formats), by including
419 @samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
420 particular format.
421
422 The default format is taken from the environment variable
423 @code{GNUTARGET}.
424 @ifset UsesEnvVars
425 @xref{Environment}.
426 @end ifset
427 You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
428 @code{TARGET};
429 @ifclear man
430 see @ref{Format Commands}.
431 @end ifclear
432 @end ifclear
433
434 @kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
435 @kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
436 @cindex compatibility, MRI
437 @item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
438 @itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
439 For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
440 files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
441 @ifclear man
442 @ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
443 @end ifclear
444 @ifset man
445 the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
446 @end ifset
447 Introduce MRI script files with
448 the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
449 scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
450 If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
451 specified by any @samp{-L} options.
452
453 @cindex common allocation
454 @kindex -d
455 @kindex -dc
456 @kindex -dp
457 @item -d
458 @itemx -dc
459 @itemx -dp
460 These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
461 compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
462 even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
463 script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
464 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
465
466 @kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
467 @kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
468 @item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
469 @itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
470 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
471 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
472 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
473 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
474 option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
475 The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
476
477 @cindex entry point, from command line
478 @kindex -e @var{entry}
479 @kindex --entry=@var{entry}
480 @item -e @var{entry}
481 @itemx --entry=@var{entry}
482 Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
483 program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
484 named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
485 and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
486 base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
487 @samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
488 and other ways of specifying the entry point.
489
490 @kindex --exclude-libs
491 @item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
492 Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
493 exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
494 @code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
495 automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
496 port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
497 explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
498 option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
499 be treated as hidden.
500
501 @kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
502 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
503 Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
504 should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
505 into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
506 may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
507 used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
508 the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
509 match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
510 command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
511 of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
512 regardless of this option.
513
514 @cindex dynamic symbol table
515 @kindex -E
516 @kindex --export-dynamic
517 @kindex --no-export-dynamic
518 @item -E
519 @itemx --export-dynamic
520 @itemx --no-export-dynamic
521 When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
522 option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
523 all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
524 set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
525
526 If you do not use either of these options (or use the
527 @option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
528 dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
529 referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
530
531 If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
532 back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
533 dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
534 linking the program itself.
535
536 You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
537 be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
538 See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
539
540 Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
541 support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
542 the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
543
544 @ifclear SingleFormat
545 @cindex big-endian objects
546 @cindex endianness
547 @kindex -EB
548 @item -EB
549 Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
550
551 @cindex little-endian objects
552 @kindex -EL
553 @item -EL
554 Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
555 @end ifclear
556
557 @kindex -f @var{name}
558 @kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
559 @item -f @var{name}
560 @itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
561 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
562 to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
563 table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
564 symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
565
566 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
567 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
568 the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
569 first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
570 @var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
571 in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
572 Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
573 implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
574 machine specific performance.
575
576 This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
577 will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
578
579 @kindex -F @var{name}
580 @kindex --filter=@var{name}
581 @item -F @var{name}
582 @itemx --filter=@var{name}
583 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
584 the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
585 of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
586 on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
587
588 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
589 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
590 dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
591 filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
592 found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
593 used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
594 @var{name}.
595
596 Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
597 toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
598 object files.
599 @ifclear SingleFormat
600 The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
601 @option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
602 @code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
603 environment variable.
604 @end ifclear
605 The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
606 creating an ELF shared object.
607
608 @cindex finalization function
609 @kindex -fini=@var{name}
610 @item -fini=@var{name}
611 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
612 executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
613 address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
614 the function to call.
615
616 @kindex -g
617 @item -g
618 Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
619
620 @kindex -G @var{value}
621 @kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
622 @cindex object size
623 @item -G @var{value}
624 @itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
625 Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
626 @var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
627 MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
628 sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
629
630 @cindex runtime library name
631 @kindex -h @var{name}
632 @kindex -soname=@var{name}
633 @item -h @var{name}
634 @itemx -soname=@var{name}
635 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
636 the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
637 which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
638 linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
639 field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
640
641 @kindex -i
642 @cindex incremental link
643 @item -i
644 Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
645
646 @cindex initialization function
647 @kindex -init=@var{name}
648 @item -init=@var{name}
649 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
650 executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
651 of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
652 function to call.
653
654 @cindex archive files, from cmd line
655 @kindex -l @var{namespec}
656 @kindex --library=@var{namespec}
657 @item -l @var{namespec}
658 @itemx --library=@var{namespec}
659 Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
660 list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
661 If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
662 will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
663 will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
664
665 On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
666 files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
667 and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
668 called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
669 @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
670 indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
671 to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
672 @var{filename}.
673
674 The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
675 specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
676 was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
677 command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
678 archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
679 the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
680
681 See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
682 archives multiple times.
683
684 You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
685
686 @ifset GENERIC
687 This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
688 if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
689 behaviour of the AIX linker.
690 @end ifset
691
692 @cindex search directory, from cmd line
693 @kindex -L @var{dir}
694 @kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
695 @item -L @var{searchdir}
696 @itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
697 Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
698 for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
699 option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
700 in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
701 on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
702 @option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
703 order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
704 how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
705 option is specified.
706
707 If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
708 by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, a path specified when the linker is configured.
709
710 @ifset UsesEnvVars
711 The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
712 @samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
713 some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
714 @end ifset
715
716 The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
717 @code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
718 at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
719
720 @cindex emulation
721 @kindex -m @var{emulation}
722 @item -m @var{emulation}
723 Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
724 emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
725
726 If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
727 @code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
728
729 Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
730 configured.
731
732 @cindex link map
733 @kindex -M
734 @kindex --print-map
735 @item -M
736 @itemx --print-map
737 Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
738 information about the link, including the following:
739
740 @itemize @bullet
741 @item
742 Where object files are mapped into memory.
743 @item
744 How common symbols are allocated.
745 @item
746 All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
747 which caused the archive member to be brought in.
748 @item
749 The values assigned to symbols.
750
751 Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
752 involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
753 have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
754 linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
755 of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
756 the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
757 linker script containing:
758
759 @smallexample
760 foo = 1
761 foo = foo * 4
762 foo = foo + 8
763 @end smallexample
764
765 will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
766 option is used:
767
768 @smallexample
769 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
770 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
771 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
772 @end smallexample
773
774 See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
775 scripts.
776 @end itemize
777
778 @kindex -n
779 @cindex read-only text
780 @cindex NMAGIC
781 @kindex --nmagic
782 @item -n
783 @itemx --nmagic
784 Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
785 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
786 mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
787
788 @kindex -N
789 @kindex --omagic
790 @cindex read/write from cmd line
791 @cindex OMAGIC
792 @item -N
793 @itemx --omagic
794 Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
795 not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
796 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
797 mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
798 is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
799 specification published by Microsoft.
800
801 @kindex --no-omagic
802 @cindex OMAGIC
803 @item --no-omagic
804 This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
805 sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
806 be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
807 shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
808
809 @kindex -o @var{output}
810 @kindex --output=@var{output}
811 @cindex naming the output file
812 @item -o @var{output}
813 @itemx --output=@var{output}
814 Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
815 option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
816 script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
817
818 @kindex -O @var{level}
819 @cindex generating optimized output
820 @item -O @var{level}
821 If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
822 the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
823 should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
824 option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
825 the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
826 no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
827 of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
828
829 @kindex -q
830 @kindex --emit-relocs
831 @cindex retain relocations in final executable
832 @item -q
833 @itemx --emit-relocs
834 Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
835 Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
836 order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
837 in larger executables.
838
839 This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
840
841 @kindex --force-dynamic
842 @cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
843 @item --force-dynamic
844 Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
845 to VxWorks targets.
846
847 @cindex partial link
848 @cindex relocatable output
849 @kindex -r
850 @kindex --relocatable
851 @item -r
852 @itemx --relocatable
853 Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
854 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
855 linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
856 magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
857 @code{OMAGIC}.
858 @c ; see @option{-N}.
859 If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
860 linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
861 constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
862
863 When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
864 partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
865 relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
866 example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
867 with input files in other formats at all.
868
869 This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
870
871 @kindex -R @var{file}
872 @kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
873 @cindex symbol-only input
874 @item -R @var{filename}
875 @itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
876 Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
877 relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
878 to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
879 programs. You may use this option more than once.
880
881 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
882 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
883 the @option{-rpath} option.
884
885 @kindex -s
886 @kindex --strip-all
887 @cindex strip all symbols
888 @item -s
889 @itemx --strip-all
890 Omit all symbol information from the output file.
891
892 @kindex -S
893 @kindex --strip-debug
894 @cindex strip debugger symbols
895 @item -S
896 @itemx --strip-debug
897 Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
898
899 @kindex -t
900 @kindex --trace
901 @cindex input files, displaying
902 @item -t
903 @itemx --trace
904 Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
905
906 @kindex -T @var{script}
907 @kindex --script=@var{script}
908 @cindex script files
909 @item -T @var{scriptfile}
910 @itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
911 Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
912 @command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
913 @var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
914 output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
915 the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
916 specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
917 options accumulate.
918
919 @kindex -dT @var{script}
920 @kindex --default-script=@var{script}
921 @cindex script files
922 @item -dT @var{scriptfile}
923 @itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
924 Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
925
926 This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
927 processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
928 command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
929 @option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
930 behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
931 command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
932 the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
933 @samp{gcc}).
934
935 @kindex -u @var{symbol}
936 @kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
937 @cindex undefined symbol
938 @item -u @var{symbol}
939 @itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
940 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
941 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
942 modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
943 different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
944 option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
945
946 @kindex -Ur
947 @cindex constructors
948 @item -Ur
949 For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
950 @samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
951 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
952 @emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
953 It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
954 with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
955 be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
956 @samp{-r} for the others.
957
958 @kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
959 @item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
960 Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
961 @var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
962 missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
963 specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
964 multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
965 input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
966 in a linker script.
967
968 @kindex -v
969 @kindex -V
970 @kindex --version
971 @cindex version
972 @item -v
973 @itemx --version
974 @itemx -V
975 Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
976 lists the supported emulations.
977
978 @kindex -x
979 @kindex --discard-all
980 @cindex deleting local symbols
981 @item -x
982 @itemx --discard-all
983 Delete all local symbols.
984
985 @kindex -X
986 @kindex --discard-locals
987 @cindex local symbols, deleting
988 @item -X
989 @itemx --discard-locals
990 Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
991 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
992 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
993
994 @kindex -y @var{symbol}
995 @kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
996 @cindex symbol tracing
997 @item -y @var{symbol}
998 @itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
999 Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1000 option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1001 to prepend an underscore.
1002
1003 This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1004 don't know where the reference is coming from.
1005
1006 @kindex -Y @var{path}
1007 @item -Y @var{path}
1008 Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1009 for Solaris compatibility.
1010
1011 @kindex -z @var{keyword}
1012 @item -z @var{keyword}
1013 The recognized keywords are:
1014 @table @samp
1015
1016 @item combreloc
1017 Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1018 lookup caching possible.
1019
1020 @item defs
1021 Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
1022 shared libraries are still allowed.
1023
1024 @item execstack
1025 Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1026
1027 @item global
1028 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1029 the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1030 of subsequently loaded libraries.
1031
1032 @item initfirst
1033 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1034 It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1035 before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1036 the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1037 the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1038 objects.
1039
1040 @item interpose
1041 Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1042 but the primary executable.
1043
1044 @item lazy
1045 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1046 dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1047 the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1048 Lazy binding is the default.
1049
1050 @item loadfltr
1051 Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1052 runtime.
1053
1054 @item muldefs
1055 Allows multiple definitions.
1056
1057 @item nocombreloc
1058 Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1059
1060 @item nocopyreloc
1061 Disables production of copy relocs.
1062
1063 @item nodefaultlib
1064 Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1065 ignore any default library search paths.
1066
1067 @item nodelete
1068 Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1069
1070 @item nodlopen
1071 Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1072
1073 @item nodump
1074 Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1075
1076 @item noexecstack
1077 Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1078
1079 @item norelro
1080 Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1081
1082 @item now
1083 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1084 dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1085 when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1086 deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1087 first called.
1088
1089 @item origin
1090 Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1091
1092 @item relro
1093 Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1094
1095 @item max-page-size=@var{value}
1096 Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1097
1098 @item common-page-size=@var{value}
1099 Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1100
1101 @item stack-size=@var{value}
1102 Specify a stack size for in an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1103 Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1104 @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1105
1106 @end table
1107
1108 Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
1109
1110 @kindex -(
1111 @cindex groups of archives
1112 @item -( @var{archives} -)
1113 @itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1114 The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1115 either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1116
1117 The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1118 references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1119 the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1120 archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1121 object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1122 would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1123 they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1124 resolved.
1125
1126 Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1127 it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1128 more archives.
1129
1130 @kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1131 @kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1132 @item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1133 @itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1134 Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
1135 recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
1136 and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1137 the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1138 behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1139 so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1140 restore the old behaviour.
1141
1142 @kindex --as-needed
1143 @kindex --no-as-needed
1144 @item --as-needed
1145 @itemx --no-as-needed
1146 This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
1147 on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
1148 the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1149 on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
1150 needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
1151 emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1152 non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1153 the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other libraries, a
1154 non-weak undefined symbol reference from another dynamic library.
1155 Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1156 the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1157 needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1158 from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1159
1160 @kindex --add-needed
1161 @kindex --no-add-needed
1162 @item --add-needed
1163 @itemx --no-add-needed
1164 These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1165 their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1166 options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1167 and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1168
1169 @kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1170 @item -assert @var{keyword}
1171 This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1172
1173 @kindex -Bdynamic
1174 @kindex -dy
1175 @kindex -call_shared
1176 @item -Bdynamic
1177 @itemx -dy
1178 @itemx -call_shared
1179 Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1180 for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1181 default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1182 for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1183 multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
1184 @option{-l} options which follow it.
1185
1186 @kindex -Bgroup
1187 @item -Bgroup
1188 Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1189 section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1190 object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
1191 @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1192 only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
1193
1194 @kindex -Bstatic
1195 @kindex -dn
1196 @kindex -non_shared
1197 @kindex -static
1198 @item -Bstatic
1199 @itemx -dn
1200 @itemx -non_shared
1201 @itemx -static
1202 Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1203 platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1204 variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1205 may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
1206 library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
1207 option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1208 option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1209 shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1210 references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
1211 libraries.
1212
1213 @kindex -Bsymbolic
1214 @item -Bsymbolic
1215 When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1216 definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1217 for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1218 within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1219 platforms which support shared libraries.
1220
1221 @kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1222 @item -Bsymbolic-functions
1223 When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
1224 symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
1225 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1226 libraries.
1227
1228 @kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1229 @item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1230 Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1231 typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1232 global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1233 within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1234 to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1235 in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1236 which support shared libraries.
1237
1238 The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1239 scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1240
1241 @kindex --dynamic-list-data
1242 @item --dynamic-list-data
1243 Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1244
1245 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1246 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1247 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1248 is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1249
1250 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1251 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1252 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1253
1254 @kindex --check-sections
1255 @kindex --no-check-sections
1256 @item --check-sections
1257 @itemx --no-check-sections
1258 Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
1259 been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
1260 perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1261 suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1262 allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
1263 restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
1264 Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1265 force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1266 option.
1267
1268 @kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1269 @kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1270 @item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1271 @itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1272 This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
1273 by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
1274 command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
1275 output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
1276 input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1277 specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
1278 follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1279 behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1280
1281 This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
1282 libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1283 mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1284 their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1285 required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1286 the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1287 dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
1288 symbols.
1289
1290 @cindex cross reference table
1291 @kindex --cref
1292 @item --cref
1293 Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1294 generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1295 Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1296
1297 The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1298 easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1299 sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1300 symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1301 definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1302 where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1303 symbol are listed.
1304
1305 @cindex common allocation
1306 @kindex --no-define-common
1307 @item --no-define-common
1308 This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1309 The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1310 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1311
1312 The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1313 the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1314 of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1315 forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1316 Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1317 from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1318 This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1319 and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1320 duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1321 paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1322
1323 @cindex symbols, from command line
1324 @kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1325 @item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
1326 Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1327 address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1328 times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1329 limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1330 context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1331 symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1332 constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1333 using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments,,
1334 Assignment: Symbol Definitions}). @emph{Note:} there should be no white
1335 space between @var{symbol}, the equals sign (``@key{=}''), and
1336 @var{expression}.
1337
1338 @cindex demangling, from command line
1339 @kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
1340 @kindex --no-demangle
1341 @item --demangle[=@var{style}]
1342 @itemx --no-demangle
1343 These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1344 and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1345 present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1346 underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
1347 mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1348 different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1349 to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
1350 demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1351 is set. These options may be used to override the default.
1352
1353 @cindex dynamic linker, from command line
1354 @kindex -I@var{file}
1355 @kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1356 @item -I@var{file}
1357 @itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1358 Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1359 generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1360 linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1361 doing.
1362
1363 @kindex --fatal-warnings
1364 @kindex --no-fatal-warnings
1365 @item --fatal-warnings
1366 @itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1367 Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1368 with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
1369
1370 @kindex --force-exe-suffix
1371 @item --force-exe-suffix
1372 Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1373
1374 If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1375 @code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1376 the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1377 option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1378 Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1379 it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1380
1381 @kindex --gc-sections
1382 @kindex --no-gc-sections
1383 @cindex garbage collection
1384 @item --gc-sections
1385 @itemx --no-gc-sections
1386 Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
1387 targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
1388 performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1389 @samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line.
1390
1391 @samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1392 examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1393 symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1394 command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1395 referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1396 libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1397 referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1398 the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1399 relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1400
1401 This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
1402 @samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
1403 specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1404 a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1405
1406 @kindex --print-gc-sections
1407 @kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1408 @cindex garbage collection
1409 @item --print-gc-sections
1410 @itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1411 List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1412 printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1413 collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1414 default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1415 be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1416 line.
1417
1418 @kindex --print-output-format
1419 @cindex output format
1420 @item --print-output-format
1421 Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1422 other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1423 in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1424
1425 @cindex help
1426 @cindex usage
1427 @kindex --help
1428 @item --help
1429 Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1430
1431 @kindex --target-help
1432 @item --target-help
1433 Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1434
1435 @kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1436 @item -Map=@var{mapfile}
1437 Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
1438 @option{-M} option, above.
1439
1440 @cindex memory usage
1441 @kindex --no-keep-memory
1442 @item --no-keep-memory
1443 @command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1444 symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
1445 instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
1446 necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
1447 while linking a large executable.
1448
1449 @kindex --no-undefined
1450 @kindex -z defs
1451 @item --no-undefined
1452 @itemx -z defs
1453 Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1454 is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1455 The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1456 behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
1457 libraries being linked in.
1458
1459 @kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1460 @kindex -z muldefs
1461 @item --allow-multiple-definition
1462 @itemx -z muldefs
1463 Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1464 report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1465 first definition will be used.
1466
1467 @kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
1468 @kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1469 @item --allow-shlib-undefined
1470 @itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1471 Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
1472 This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1473 determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1474 shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1475 how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1476
1477 The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1478 referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1479 an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1480 a shared library.
1481
1482 The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1483 libraries specified at link time are that:
1484
1485 @itemize @bullet
1486 @item
1487 A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1488 that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1489 resolvable at load time.
1490 @item
1491 There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1492 symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1493
1494 The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1495 select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1496 architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1497 appropriate memset function.
1498 @end itemize
1499
1500 @kindex --no-undefined-version
1501 @item --no-undefined-version
1502 Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1503 it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1504 will be issued instead.
1505
1506 @kindex --default-symver
1507 @item --default-symver
1508 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1509 exported symbols.
1510
1511 @kindex --default-imported-symver
1512 @item --default-imported-symver
1513 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1514 imported symbols.
1515
1516 @kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1517 @item --no-warn-mismatch
1518 Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
1519 files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1520 been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
1521 This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
1522 errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1523 have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1524 inappropriate.
1525
1526 @kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1527 @item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1528 Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1529 library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1530
1531 @kindex --no-whole-archive
1532 @item --no-whole-archive
1533 Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
1534 archive files.
1535
1536 @cindex output file after errors
1537 @kindex --noinhibit-exec
1538 @item --noinhibit-exec
1539 Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1540 Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1541 errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1542 when it issues any error whatsoever.
1543
1544 @kindex -nostdlib
1545 @item -nostdlib
1546 Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1547 command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1548 (including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1549
1550 @ifclear SingleFormat
1551 @kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1552 @item --oformat=@var{output-format}
1553 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1554 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
1555 @samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
1556 object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1557 object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
1558 should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1559 usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1560 name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1561 list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1562 command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1563 this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1564 @end ifclear
1565
1566 @kindex -pie
1567 @kindex --pic-executable
1568 @item -pie
1569 @itemx --pic-executable
1570 @cindex position independent executables
1571 Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1572 ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1573 libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
1574 address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
1575 normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1576 defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1577
1578 @kindex -qmagic
1579 @item -qmagic
1580 This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1581
1582 @kindex -Qy
1583 @item -Qy
1584 This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1585
1586 @kindex --relax
1587 @cindex synthesizing linker
1588 @cindex relaxing addressing modes
1589 @cindex --no-relax
1590 @item --relax
1591 @itemx --no-relax
1592 An option with machine dependent effects.
1593 @ifset GENERIC
1594 This option is only supported on a few targets.
1595 @end ifset
1596 @ifset H8300
1597 @xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
1598 @end ifset
1599 @ifset I960
1600 @xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
1601 @end ifset
1602 @ifset XTENSA
1603 @xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1604 @end ifset
1605 @ifset M68HC11
1606 @xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1607 @end ifset
1608 @ifset POWERPC
1609 @xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1610 @end ifset
1611
1612 On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1613 global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1614 addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1615 synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
1616 instructions, and combining constant values.
1617
1618 On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1619 debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1620 @ifset GENERIC
1621 This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1622 family of processors.
1623 @end ifset
1624
1625 @ifset GENERIC
1626 On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1627 but ignored.
1628 @end ifset
1629
1630 On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1631 @samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1632
1633 @cindex retaining specified symbols
1634 @cindex stripping all but some symbols
1635 @cindex symbols, retaining selectively
1636 @kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1637 @item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1638 Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1639 discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1640 symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1641 @ifset GENERIC
1642 (such as VxWorks)
1643 @end ifset
1644 where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1645 run-time memory.
1646
1647 @samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1648 or symbols needed for relocations.
1649
1650 You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1651 line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1652
1653 @ifset GENERIC
1654 @item -rpath=@var{dir}
1655 @cindex runtime library search path
1656 @kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
1657 Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
1658 linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
1659 arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
1660 them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
1661 also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1662 objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
1663 @option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
1664 ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1665 @code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1666
1667 The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
1668 SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
1669 @option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1670 runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1671 options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1672 gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
1673 file systems.
1674
1675 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
1676 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
1677 the @option{-rpath} option.
1678 @end ifset
1679
1680 @ifset GENERIC
1681 @cindex link-time runtime library search path
1682 @kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1683 @item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1684 When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1685 happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1686 of the input files.
1687
1688 When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1689 non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1690 shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
1691 explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
1692 specifies the first set of directories to search. The
1693 @option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
1694 either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1695 appearing multiple times.
1696
1697 This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1698 that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1699 is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1700 runtime linker would do.
1701
1702 The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
1703 libraries:
1704 @enumerate
1705 @item
1706 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
1707 @item
1708 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1709 between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1710 specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1711 used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
1712 at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1713 by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1714 the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
1715 @item
1716 On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1717 @option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1718 environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
1719 @item
1720 On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1721 directories specified using @option{-L} options.
1722 @item
1723 For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
1724 variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
1725 @item
1726 For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1727 @code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1728 libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1729 @code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1730 @item
1731 The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1732 @item
1733 For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1734 exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1735 @end enumerate
1736
1737 If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1738 warning and continue with the link.
1739 @end ifset
1740
1741 @kindex -shared
1742 @kindex -Bshareable
1743 @item -shared
1744 @itemx -Bshareable
1745 @cindex shared libraries
1746 Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1747 and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
1748 shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
1749 undefined symbols in the link.
1750
1751 @kindex --sort-common
1752 @item --sort-common
1753 @itemx --sort-common=ascending
1754 @itemx --sort-common=descending
1755 This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1756 ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1757 sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1758 eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1759 between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1760 specified, then descending order is assumed.
1761
1762 @kindex --sort-section=name
1763 @item --sort-section=name
1764 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1765 patterns in the linker script.
1766
1767 @kindex --sort-section=alignment
1768 @item --sort-section=alignment
1769 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1770 patterns in the linker script.
1771
1772 @kindex --split-by-file
1773 @item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
1774 Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
1775 each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1776 size of 1 if not given.
1777
1778 @kindex --split-by-reloc
1779 @item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
1780 Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
1781 output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
1782 This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
1783 certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1784 cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1785 that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1786 support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1787 input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1788 more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
1789 many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
1790
1791 @kindex --stats
1792 @item --stats
1793 Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1794 as execution time and memory usage.
1795
1796 @kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
1797 @item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1798 Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1799 configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1800 that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1801
1802 @kindex --traditional-format
1803 @cindex traditional format
1804 @item --traditional-format
1805 For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1806 the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
1807 use the traditional format instead.
1808
1809 @cindex dbx
1810 For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
1811 symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1812 full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1813 @code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
1814 trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
1815 combine duplicate entries.
1816
1817 @kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1818 @item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1819 Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1820 address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1821 times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1822 line.
1823 @var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1824 for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1825 @samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1826 should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1827 sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1828
1829 @kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1830 @kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1831 @kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
1832 @cindex segment origins, cmd line
1833 @item -Tbss=@var{org}
1834 @itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1835 @itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1836 Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
1837 @code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
1838
1839 @kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1840 @item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1841 @cindex text segment origin, cmd line
1842 When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
1843 byte of the text segment.
1844
1845 @kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1846 @item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1847 @cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
1848 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
1849 the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
1850 text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
1851
1852 @kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1853 @item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1854 @cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
1855 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
1856 model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
1857
1858 @kindex --unresolved-symbols
1859 @item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1860 Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1861 values for @samp{method}:
1862
1863 @table @samp
1864 @item ignore-all
1865 Do not report any unresolved symbols.
1866
1867 @item report-all
1868 Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
1869
1870 @item ignore-in-object-files
1871 Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
1872 ignore them if they come from regular object files.
1873
1874 @item ignore-in-shared-libs
1875 Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
1876 ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
1877 when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
1878 libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
1879 command line.
1880 @end table
1881
1882 The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
1883 by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
1884
1885 Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
1886 unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
1887 can change this to a warning.
1888
1889 @kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
1890 @cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
1891 @item --dll-verbose
1892 @itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
1893 Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
1894 supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1895 the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
1896 argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
1897
1898 @kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1899 @cindex version script, symbol versions
1900 @item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1901 Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
1902 used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
1903 about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
1904 is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
1905 see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
1906 use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
1907 symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
1908 @xref{WIN32}.
1909
1910 @kindex --warn-common
1911 @cindex warnings, on combining symbols
1912 @cindex combining symbols, warnings on
1913 @item --warn-common
1914 Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
1915 a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
1916 but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
1917 you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
1918 Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
1919 warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
1920
1921 There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
1922
1923 @table @samp
1924 @item int i = 1;
1925 A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
1926 file.
1927
1928 @item extern int i;
1929 An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
1930 There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
1931 variable somewhere.
1932
1933 @item int i;
1934 A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
1935 variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
1936 The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
1937 single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
1938 size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
1939 a definition of the same variable.
1940 @end table
1941
1942 The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
1943 Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
1944 just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
1945 encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
1946 a common symbol.
1947
1948 @enumerate
1949 @item
1950 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
1951 definition for the symbol.
1952 @smallexample
1953 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1954 overridden by definition
1955 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
1956 @end smallexample
1957
1958 @item
1959 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
1960 the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
1961 except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
1962 @smallexample
1963 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
1964 overriding common
1965 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
1966 @end smallexample
1967
1968 @item
1969 Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
1970 @smallexample
1971 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
1972 of `@var{symbol}'
1973 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
1974 @end smallexample
1975
1976 @item
1977 Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
1978 @smallexample
1979 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1980 overridden by larger common
1981 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
1982 @end smallexample
1983
1984 @item
1985 Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
1986 the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
1987 encountered in a different order.
1988 @smallexample
1989 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1990 overriding smaller common
1991 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
1992 @end smallexample
1993 @end enumerate
1994
1995 @kindex --warn-constructors
1996 @item --warn-constructors
1997 Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
1998 object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
1999 detect the use of global constructors.
2000
2001 @kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2002 @item --warn-multiple-gp
2003 Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2004 This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2005 Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2006 section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2007 of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2008 base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2009 base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2010 bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2011 large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2012 values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2013 option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2014
2015 @kindex --warn-once
2016 @cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2017 @cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2018 @item --warn-once
2019 Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2020 which refers to it.
2021
2022 @kindex --warn-section-align
2023 @cindex warnings, on section alignment
2024 @cindex section alignment, warnings on
2025 @item --warn-section-align
2026 Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2027 alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2028 The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2029 is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2030 the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2031
2032 @kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2033 @item --warn-shared-textrel
2034 Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
2035
2036 @kindex --warn-alternate-em
2037 @item --warn-alternate-em
2038 Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2039
2040 @kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2041 @item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2042 If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2043 @option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2044 This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2045
2046 @kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2047 @item --error-unresolved-symbols
2048 This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2049 it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2050
2051 @kindex --whole-archive
2052 @cindex including an entire archive
2053 @item --whole-archive
2054 For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
2055 @option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
2056 in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2057 files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2058 library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2059 library. This option may be used more than once.
2060
2061 Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
2062 about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2063 Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
2064 list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2065 your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2066
2067 @kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2068 @item --wrap=@var{symbol}
2069 Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2070 @var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2071 undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2072 @var{symbol}.
2073
2074 This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2075 wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2076 wishes to call the system function, it should call
2077 @code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2078
2079 Here is a trivial example:
2080
2081 @smallexample
2082 void *
2083 __wrap_malloc (size_t c)
2084 @{
2085 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
2086 return __real_malloc (c);
2087 @}
2088 @end smallexample
2089
2090 If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
2091 all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2092 instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2093 call the real @code{malloc} function.
2094
2095 You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
2096 links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
2097 you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2098 file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2099 call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2100
2101 @kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2102 @item --eh-frame-hdr
2103 Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2104 @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2105
2106 @kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2107 @item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2108 Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2109 generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2110 if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2111
2112 @kindex --enable-new-dtags
2113 @kindex --disable-new-dtags
2114 @item --enable-new-dtags
2115 @itemx --disable-new-dtags
2116 This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2117 systems may not understand them. If you specify
2118 @option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2119 and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
2120 If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
2121 created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2122 those options are only available for ELF systems.
2123
2124 @kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
2125 @item --hash-size=@var{number}
2126 Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2127 close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2128 time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2129 increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2130 value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2131
2132 @kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2133 @item --hash-style=@var{style}
2134 Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2135 @code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2136 new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2137 the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2138 hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2139
2140 @kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2141 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
2142 This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
2143 linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
2144 for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2145 about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2146
2147 Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2148 1021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
2149 run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2150 has been used.
2151
2152 The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2153 enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
2154
2155 @kindex --build-id
2156 @kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2157 @item --build-id
2158 @itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2159 Request creation of @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section.
2160 The contents of the note are unique bits identifying this linked
2161 file. @var{style} can be @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits,
2162 @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative
2163 parts of the output contents, @code{md5} to use a 128-bit
2164 @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of the output contents, or
2165 @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit string specified as
2166 an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and @code{:}
2167 characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style} is
2168 omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2169
2170 The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2171 that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2172 unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2173 to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2174 file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2175 string identifying the original linked file does not change.
2176
2177 Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2178 @code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
2179 @end table
2180
2181 @c man end
2182
2183 @subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
2184
2185 @c man begin OPTIONS
2186
2187 The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
2188 the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2189 normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2190 use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2191 @code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2192 like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2193 symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2194 object file).
2195
2196 In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2197 support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2198 PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2199 values by either a space or an equals sign.
2200
2201 @table @gcctabopt
2202
2203 @kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2204 @item --add-stdcall-alias
2205 If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2206 as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
2207 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2208
2209 @kindex --base-file
2210 @item --base-file @var{file}
2211 Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2212 addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2213 @file{dlltool}.
2214 [This is an i386 PE specific option]
2215
2216 @kindex --dll
2217 @item --dll
2218 Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
2219 @option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
2220 file.
2221 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2222
2223 @kindex --enable-long-section-names
2224 @kindex --disable-long-section-names
2225 @item --enable-long-section-names
2226 @itemx --disable-long-section-names
2227 The PE variants of the Coff object format add an extension that permits
2228 the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2229 for Coff. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2230 fully-linked executable images do not carry the Coff string table required
2231 to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2232 allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2233 disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2234 generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2235 as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
2236 with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2237 GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
2238 information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2239 option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2240 section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2241 when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2242 image and not stripping symbols.
2243 [This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2244
2245 @kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2246 @kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2247 @item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2248 @itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2249 If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
2250 do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
2251 only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2252 resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2253 undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2254 @code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2255 to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2256 warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2257 import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
2258 to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
2259 feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
2260 @option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
2261 mismatches are considered to be errors.
2262 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2263
2264 @kindex --leading-underscore
2265 @kindex --no-leading-underscore
2266 @item --leading-underscore
2267 @itemx --no-leading-underscore
2268 For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2269 in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2270 disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2271
2272 @cindex DLLs, creating
2273 @kindex --export-all-symbols
2274 @item --export-all-symbols
2275 If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2276 be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2277 otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2278 explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2279 attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2280 option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
2281 @code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
2282 @code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
2283 exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2284 re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2285 such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2286 @code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
2287 @code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2288 Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2289 not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
2290 extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
2291 (obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
2292 These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2293 @code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2294 @code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
2295 @code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
2296 @code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
2297 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2298
2299 @kindex --exclude-symbols
2300 @item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
2301 Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2302 exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
2303 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2304
2305 @kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2306 @item --exclude-all-symbols
2307 Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2308 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2309
2310 @kindex --file-alignment
2311 @item --file-alignment
2312 Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2313 file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2314 512.
2315 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2316
2317 @cindex heap size
2318 @kindex --heap
2319 @item --heap @var{reserve}
2320 @itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2321 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2322 to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
2323 committed.
2324 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2325
2326 @cindex image base
2327 @kindex --image-base
2328 @item --image-base @var{value}
2329 Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2330 the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2331 is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2332 your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2333 other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2334 for dlls.
2335 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2336
2337 @kindex --kill-at
2338 @item --kill-at
2339 If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2340 symbols before they are exported.
2341 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2342
2343 @kindex --large-address-aware
2344 @item --large-address-aware
2345 If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
2346 header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
2347 greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
2348 or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2349 section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2350 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2351
2352 @kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2353 @item --disable-large-address-aware
2354 Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2355 This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2356 driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2357 addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2358 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2359
2360 @kindex --major-image-version
2361 @item --major-image-version @var{value}
2362 Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
2363 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2364
2365 @kindex --major-os-version
2366 @item --major-os-version @var{value}
2367 Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
2368 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2369
2370 @kindex --major-subsystem-version
2371 @item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
2372 Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
2373 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2374
2375 @kindex --minor-image-version
2376 @item --minor-image-version @var{value}
2377 Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
2378 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2379
2380 @kindex --minor-os-version
2381 @item --minor-os-version @var{value}
2382 Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
2383 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2384
2385 @kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2386 @item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
2387 Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
2388 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2389
2390 @cindex DEF files, creating
2391 @cindex DLLs, creating
2392 @kindex --output-def
2393 @item --output-def @var{file}
2394 The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2395 file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2396 (which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2397 library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2398 automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
2399 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2400
2401 @cindex DLLs, creating
2402 @kindex --out-implib
2403 @item --out-implib @var{file}
2404 The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2405 import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2406 import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
2407 may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
2408 makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2409 creation step.
2410 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2411
2412 @kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2413 @item --enable-auto-image-base
2414 Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, unless one is specified
2415 using the @code{--image-base} argument. By using a hash generated
2416 from the dllname to create unique image bases for each DLL, in-memory
2417 collisions and relocations which can delay program execution are
2418 avoided.
2419 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2420
2421 @kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2422 @item --disable-auto-image-base
2423 Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2424 user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2425 default.
2426 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2427
2428 @cindex DLLs, linking to
2429 @kindex --dll-search-prefix
2430 @item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
2431 When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
2432 search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
2433 @code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
2434 between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2435 uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
2436 @code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
2437 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2438
2439 @kindex --enable-auto-import
2440 @item --enable-auto-import
2441 Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2442 DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
2443 building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2444 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2445 to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2446 specification published by Microsoft.
2447
2448 Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2449 data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2450 placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2451 around a problem with consts that is described here:
2452 http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2453
2454 Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2455 see this message:
2456
2457 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
2458 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2459
2460 This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2461 ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
2462 allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2463 fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2464 constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2465 multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2466 this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2467 of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2468 the warning, and exit.
2469
2470 There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2471 data type of the exported variable:
2472
2473 One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2474 of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
2475 this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2476
2477 A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2478 that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2479 there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
2480 a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2481
2482 @example
2483 extern type extern_array[];
2484 extern_array[1] -->
2485 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2486 @end example
2487
2488 or
2489
2490 @example
2491 extern type extern_array[];
2492 extern_array[1] -->
2493 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2494 @end example
2495
2496 For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2497 is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
2498
2499 @example
2500 extern struct s extern_struct;
2501 extern_struct.field -->
2502 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2503 @end example
2504
2505 or
2506
2507 @example
2508 extern long long extern_ll;
2509 extern_ll -->
2510 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2511 @end example
2512
2513 A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
2514 'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
2515 @code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
2516 requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
2517 building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2518 merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2519 between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
2520 constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2521
2522 Original:
2523 @example
2524 --foo.h
2525 extern int arr[];
2526 --foo.c
2527 #include "foo.h"
2528 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2529 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2530 @}
2531 @end example
2532
2533 Solution 1:
2534 @example
2535 --foo.h
2536 extern int arr[];
2537 --foo.c
2538 #include "foo.h"
2539 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2540 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2541 volatile int *parr = arr;
2542 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2543 @}
2544 @end example
2545
2546 Solution 2:
2547 @example
2548 --foo.h
2549 /* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2550 #if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2551 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2552 #define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2553 #else
2554 #define FOO_IMPORT
2555 #endif
2556 extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2557 --foo.c
2558 #include "foo.h"
2559 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2560 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2561 @}
2562 @end example
2563
2564 A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
2565 library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2566 for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2567 functions).
2568 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2569
2570 @kindex --disable-auto-import
2571 @item --disable-auto-import
2572 Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
2573 @code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
2574 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2575
2576 @kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2577 @item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2578 If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2579 that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2580 a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
2581 environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
2582 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2583
2584 @kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2585 @item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2586 Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
2587 DLLs.
2588 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2589
2590 @kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2591 @item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2592 Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
2593 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2594
2595 @kindex --section-alignment
2596 @item --section-alignment
2597 Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2598 addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
2599 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2600
2601 @cindex stack size
2602 @kindex --stack
2603 @item --stack @var{reserve}
2604 @itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2605 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2606 to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
2607 committed.
2608 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2609
2610 @kindex --subsystem
2611 @item --subsystem @var{which}
2612 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2613 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2614 Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2615 legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
2616 @code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2617 the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2618 @var{which}.
2619 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2620
2621 The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2622 of the PE file header:
2623 [These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2624
2625 @kindex --dynamicbase
2626 @item --dynamicbase
2627 The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2628 randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2629 Vista for i386 PE targets.
2630
2631 @kindex --forceinteg
2632 @item --forceinteg
2633 Code integrity checks are enforced.
2634
2635 @kindex --nxcompat
2636 @item --nxcompat
2637 The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2638 This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2639
2640 @kindex --no-isolation
2641 @item --no-isolation
2642 Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2643
2644 @kindex --no-seh
2645 @item --no-seh
2646 The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2647 this image.
2648
2649 @kindex --no-bind
2650 @item --no-bind
2651 Do not bind this image.
2652
2653 @kindex --wdmdriver
2654 @item --wdmdriver
2655 The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
2656
2657 @kindex --tsaware
2658 @item --tsaware
2659 The image is Terminal Server aware.
2660
2661 @kindex --insert-timestamp
2662 @item --insert-timestamp
2663 Insert a real timestamp into the image, rather than the default value
2664 of zero. This will result in a slightly different results with each
2665 invocation, which could be helpful for distributing unique images.
2666 @end table
2667
2668 @c man end
2669
2670 @ifset C6X
2671 @subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2672
2673 @c man begin OPTIONS
2674
2675 The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2676 libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2677 all executables use an index of 0.
2678
2679 @table @gcctabopt
2680
2681 @kindex --dsbt-size
2682 @item --dsbt-size @var{size}
2683 This option sets the number of entires in the DSBT of the current executable
2684 or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2685 entries.
2686
2687 @kindex --dsbt-index
2688 @item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2689 This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2690 to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2691 executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2692 @code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2693
2694 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
2695 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
2696 exidx entries in frame unwind info.
2697
2698 @end table
2699
2700 @c man end
2701 @end ifset
2702
2703 @ifset M68HC11
2704 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2705
2706 @c man begin OPTIONS
2707
2708 The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2709 memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2710
2711 @table @gcctabopt
2712
2713 @kindex --no-trampoline
2714 @item --no-trampoline
2715 This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2716 is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2717 instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2718
2719 @kindex --bank-window
2720 @item --bank-window @var{name}
2721 This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2722 the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2723 The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2724 paging and addresses within the memory window.
2725
2726 @end table
2727
2728 @c man end
2729 @end ifset
2730
2731 @ifset M68K
2732 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2733
2734 @c man begin OPTIONS
2735
2736 The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2737 when linking for 68K targets.
2738
2739 @table @gcctabopt
2740
2741 @kindex --got
2742 @item --got=@var{type}
2743 This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2744 @var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2745 @samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2746 Info entry for @file{ld}.
2747
2748 @end table
2749
2750 @c man end
2751 @end ifset
2752
2753 @ifset MIPS
2754 @subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
2755
2756 @c man begin OPTIONS
2757
2758 The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
2759 generation when linking for MIPS targets.
2760
2761 @table @gcctabopt
2762
2763 @kindex --insn32
2764 @item --insn32
2765 @kindex --no-insn32
2766 @itemx --no-insn32
2767 These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
2768 generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
2769 or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
2770 32-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
2771 used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
2772 possible.
2773
2774 @end table
2775
2776 @c man end
2777 @end ifset
2778
2779 @ifset UsesEnvVars
2780 @node Environment
2781 @section Environment Variables
2782
2783 @c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2784
2785 You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
2786 @ifclear SingleFormat
2787 @code{GNUTARGET},
2788 @end ifclear
2789 @code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
2790
2791 @ifclear SingleFormat
2792 @kindex GNUTARGET
2793 @cindex default input format
2794 @code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2795 use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2796 of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
2797 @code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
2798 of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2799 attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2800 this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2801 there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2802 object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2803 BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2804 in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
2805 @end ifclear
2806
2807 @kindex LDEMULATION
2808 @cindex default emulation
2809 @cindex emulation, default
2810 @code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2811 @samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2812 behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2813 available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2814 the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2815 variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2816 linker was configured.
2817
2818 @kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2819 @cindex demangling, default
2820 Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2821 @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2822 default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2823 a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2824 may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2825 options.
2826
2827 @c man end
2828 @end ifset
2829
2830 @node Scripts
2831 @chapter Linker Scripts
2832
2833 @cindex scripts
2834 @cindex linker scripts
2835 @cindex command files
2836 Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
2837 written in the linker command language.
2838
2839 The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
2840 the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
2841 the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
2842 more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
2843 direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
2844 described below.
2845
2846 The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
2847 yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2848 linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
2849 to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
2850 such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
2851
2852 You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
2853 line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
2854 default linker script.
2855
2856 You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
2857 to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
2858 Linker Scripts}.
2859
2860 @menu
2861 * Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
2862 * Script Format:: Linker Script Format
2863 * Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
2864 * Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
2865 * Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
2866 * SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
2867 * MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
2868 * PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
2869 * VERSION:: VERSION Command
2870 * Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
2871 * Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
2872 @end menu
2873
2874 @node Basic Script Concepts
2875 @section Basic Linker Script Concepts
2876 @cindex linker script concepts
2877 We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
2878 describe the linker script language.
2879
2880 The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
2881 file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
2882 @dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
2883 The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
2884 purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
2885 among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
2886 section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
2887 in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
2888
2889 Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
2890 also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
2891 contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
2892 the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
2893 A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
2894 area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
2895 loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
2896 which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
2897 of debugging information.
2898
2899 Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
2900 first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
2901 the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
2902 @dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
2903 section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
2904 same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
2905 is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
2906 (this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
2907 based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
2908 RAM address would be the VMA.
2909
2910 You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
2911 program with the @samp{-h} option.
2912
2913 Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
2914 @dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
2915 has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
2916 information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
2917 will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
2918 static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
2919 referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
2920
2921 You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
2922 program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
2923 option.
2924
2925 @node Script Format
2926 @section Linker Script Format
2927 @cindex linker script format
2928 Linker scripts are text files.
2929
2930 You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
2931 either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
2932 symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
2933 generally ignored.
2934
2935 Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
2936 If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
2937 otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
2938 double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
2939 file name.
2940
2941 You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
2942 @samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
2943 to whitespace.
2944
2945 @node Simple Example
2946 @section Simple Linker Script Example
2947 @cindex linker script example
2948 @cindex example of linker script
2949 Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
2950
2951 The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
2952 @samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
2953 memory layout of the output file.
2954
2955 The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
2956 describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
2957 code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
2958 @samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
2959 Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
2960 your input files.
2961
2962 For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
2963 0x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
2964 linker script which will do that:
2965 @smallexample
2966 SECTIONS
2967 @{
2968 . = 0x10000;
2969 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
2970 . = 0x8000000;
2971 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
2972 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
2973 @}
2974 @end smallexample
2975
2976 You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
2977 followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
2978 descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
2979
2980 The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
2981 sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
2982 counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
2983 other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
2984 current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
2985 incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
2986 @samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
2987
2988 The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
2989 required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
2990 after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
2991 which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
2992 wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
2993 means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
2994
2995 Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
2996 @samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
2997 @samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
2998
2999 The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3000 the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3001 at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3002 output section, the value of the location counter will be
3003 @samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3004 effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
3005 immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
3006
3007 The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3008 alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3009 example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3010 sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3011 may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3012 sections.
3013
3014 That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3015
3016 @node Simple Commands
3017 @section Simple Linker Script Commands
3018 @cindex linker script simple commands
3019 In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3020
3021 @menu
3022 * Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3023 * File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3024 @ifclear SingleFormat
3025 * Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3026 @end ifclear
3027
3028 * REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
3029 * Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3030 @end menu
3031
3032 @node Entry Point
3033 @subsection Setting the Entry Point
3034 @kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3035 @cindex start of execution
3036 @cindex first instruction
3037 @cindex entry point
3038 The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3039 point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3040 entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3041 @smallexample
3042 ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3043 @end smallexample
3044
3045 There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3046 entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3047 stopping when one of them succeeds:
3048 @itemize @bullet
3049 @item
3050 the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
3051 @item
3052 the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
3053 @item
3054 the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3055 targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3056 check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
3057 @item
3058 the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
3059 @item
3060 The address @code{0}.
3061 @end itemize
3062
3063 @node File Commands
3064 @subsection Commands Dealing with Files
3065 @cindex linker script file commands
3066 Several linker script commands deal with files.
3067
3068 @table @code
3069 @item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3070 @kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3071 @cindex including a linker script
3072 Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3073 be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
3074 with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
3075 10 levels deep.
3076
3077 You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3078 @code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3079
3080 @item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3081 @itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3082 @kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3083 @cindex input files in linker scripts
3084 @cindex input object files in linker scripts
3085 @cindex linker script input object files
3086 The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3087 in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3088
3089 For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3090 a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3091 then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3092
3093 In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3094 script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3095
3096 In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3097 with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3098 located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3099 for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3100 open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
3101 linker will search through the archive library search path. See the
3102 description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3103
3104 If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
3105 name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3106 @samp{-l}.
3107
3108 When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3109 files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3110 script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3111
3112 @item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3113 @itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3114 @kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3115 @cindex grouping input files
3116 The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3117 files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3118 new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3119 in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3120
3121 @item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3122 @itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3123 @kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3124 This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3125 commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3126 as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3127 with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3128 when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3129 @option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3130 and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3131 setting afterwards.
3132
3133 @item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3134 @kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3135 @cindex output file name in linker script
3136 The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3137 @code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3138 @samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3139 Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3140 precedence.
3141
3142 You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3143 output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3144
3145 @item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3146 @kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3147 @cindex library search path in linker script
3148 @cindex archive search path in linker script
3149 @cindex search path in linker script
3150 The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
3151 @command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
3152 @code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3153 on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3154 are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3155 the command line option are searched first.
3156
3157 @item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3158 @kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3159 @cindex first input file
3160 The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3161 that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3162 though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3163 when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3164 first file.
3165 @end table
3166
3167 @ifclear SingleFormat
3168 @node Format Commands
3169 @subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
3170 A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3171
3172 @table @code
3173 @item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3174 @itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3175 @kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3176 @cindex output file format in linker script
3177 The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3178 output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
3179 exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3180 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3181 line option takes precedence.
3182
3183 You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3184 formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3185 This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3186 desired endianness.
3187
3188 If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3189 will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3190 output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3191 used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3192
3193 For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3194 command:
3195 @smallexample
3196 OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3197 @end smallexample
3198 This says that the default format for the output file is
3199 @samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3200 option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3201 format.
3202
3203 @item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3204 @kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3205 @cindex input file format in linker script
3206 The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3207 files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3208 This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3209 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3210 is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3211 command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3212 @end table
3213 @end ifclear
3214
3215 @node REGION_ALIAS
3216 @subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3217 @kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3218 @cindex region alias
3219 @cindex region names
3220
3221 Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3222 @ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3223
3224 @smallexample
3225 REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3226 @end smallexample
3227
3228 The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3229 memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3230 to memory regions. An example follows.
3231
3232 Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3233 memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3234 that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3235 non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3236 access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3237 read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3238 sections:
3239
3240 @itemize @bullet
3241 @item
3242 @code{.text} program code;
3243 @item
3244 @code{.rodata} read-only data;
3245 @item
3246 @code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3247 @item
3248 @code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3249 @end itemize
3250
3251 The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3252 part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3253 output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3254 systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3255 @code{C}:
3256 @multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3257 @item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3258 @item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3259 @item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3260 @item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3261 @item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3262 @end multitable
3263 The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3264 loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3265 the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3266 the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3267
3268 The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3269 includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3270 memory layout:
3271 @smallexample
3272 INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3273
3274 SECTIONS
3275 @{
3276 .text :
3277 @{
3278 *(.text)
3279 @} > REGION_TEXT
3280 .rodata :
3281 @{
3282 *(.rodata)
3283 rodata_end = .;
3284 @} > REGION_RODATA
3285 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3286 @{
3287 data_start = .;
3288 *(.data)
3289 @} > REGION_DATA
3290 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3291 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3292 .bss :
3293 @{
3294 *(.bss)
3295 @} > REGION_BSS
3296 @}
3297 @end smallexample
3298
3299 Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3300 regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3301 variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3302 @table @code
3303 @item A
3304 Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3305 @smallexample
3306 MEMORY
3307 @{
3308 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3309 @}
3310
3311 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3312 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3313 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3314 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3315 @end smallexample
3316 @item B
3317 Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3318 into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3319 @code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3320 @smallexample
3321 MEMORY
3322 @{
3323 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3324 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3325 @}
3326
3327 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3328 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3329 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3330 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3331 @end smallexample
3332 @item C
3333 Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3334 @code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3335 initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3336 system start into the @code{RAM}.
3337 @smallexample
3338 MEMORY
3339 @{
3340 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3341 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3342 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3343 @}
3344
3345 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3346 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3347 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3348 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3349 @end smallexample
3350 @end table
3351
3352 It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3353 @code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3354 necessary:
3355 @smallexample
3356 #include <string.h>
3357
3358 extern char data_start [];
3359 extern char data_size [];
3360 extern char data_load_start [];
3361
3362 void copy_data(void)
3363 @{
3364 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3365 @{
3366 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3367 @}
3368 @}
3369 @end smallexample
3370
3371 @node Miscellaneous Commands
3372 @subsection Other Linker Script Commands
3373 There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3374
3375 @table @code
3376 @item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3377 @kindex ASSERT
3378 @cindex assertion in linker script
3379 Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3380 with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3381
3382 @item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3383 @kindex EXTERN
3384 @cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3385 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3386 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3387 modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3388 each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3389 command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3390
3391 @item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3392 @kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3393 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3394 This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
3395 to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
3396 output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3397
3398 @item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3399 @kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3400 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3401 This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3402 command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3403 to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3404
3405 @item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3406 @kindex INSERT
3407 @cindex insert user script into default script
3408 This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3409 augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3410 inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3411 @var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3412 default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3413 sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3414 linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3415 insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3416 linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3417 default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3418 of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3419 to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3420 is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3421
3422 @smallexample
3423 SECTIONS
3424 @{
3425 OVERLAY :
3426 @{
3427 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3428 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3429 @}
3430 @}
3431 INSERT AFTER .text;
3432 @end smallexample
3433
3434 @item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3435 @kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3436 @cindex cross references
3437 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3438 references among certain output sections.
3439
3440 In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3441 using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3442 will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3443 errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3444 a function defined in the other section.
3445
3446 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
3447 @command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
3448 an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3449 @code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3450 names.
3451
3452 @ifclear SingleFormat
3453 @item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3454 @kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3455 @cindex machine architecture
3456 @cindex architecture
3457 Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3458 of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3459 architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3460 the @samp{-f} option.
3461 @end ifclear
3462
3463 @item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3464 @kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3465 This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3466 @var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3467 in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3468 @xref{Expression Section}.
3469 @end table
3470
3471 @node Assignments
3472 @section Assigning Values to Symbols
3473 @cindex assignment in scripts
3474 @cindex symbol definition, scripts
3475 @cindex variables, defining
3476 You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
3477 the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
3478
3479 @menu
3480 * Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
3481 * HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
3482 * PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
3483 * PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3484 * Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
3485 @end menu
3486
3487 @node Simple Assignments
3488 @subsection Simple Assignments
3489
3490 You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3491
3492 @table @code
3493 @item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3494 @itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3495 @itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3496 @itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3497 @itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3498 @itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3499 @itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3500 @itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3501 @itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3502 @end table
3503
3504 The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3505 @var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3506 defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3507
3508 The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
3509 may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
3510
3511 The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3512
3513 Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3514
3515 You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3516 statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3517 section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3518
3519 The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3520 expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3521
3522 Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3523 assignments may be used:
3524
3525 @smallexample
3526 floating_point = 0;
3527 SECTIONS
3528 @{
3529 .text :
3530 @{
3531 *(.text)
3532 _etext = .;
3533 @}
3534 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
3535 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3536 @}
3537 @end smallexample
3538 @noindent
3539 In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3540 zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3541 the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3542 defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3543 upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3544
3545 @node HIDDEN
3546 @subsection HIDDEN
3547 @cindex HIDDEN
3548 For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3549 exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3550
3551 Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3552 @code{HIDDEN}:
3553
3554 @smallexample
3555 HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3556 SECTIONS
3557 @{
3558 .text :
3559 @{
3560 *(.text)
3561 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3562 @}
3563 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3564 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3565 @}
3566 @end smallexample
3567 @noindent
3568 In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3569
3570 @node PROVIDE
3571 @subsection PROVIDE
3572 @cindex PROVIDE
3573 In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3574 only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3575 the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3576 @samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3577 @samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3578 @code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3579 @samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3580 @code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3581
3582 Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3583 @smallexample
3584 SECTIONS
3585 @{
3586 .text :
3587 @{
3588 *(.text)
3589 _etext = .;
3590 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3591 @}
3592 @}
3593 @end smallexample
3594
3595 In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3596 underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3597 the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3598 underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3599 If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3600 linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3601
3602 @node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3603 @subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3604 @cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3605 Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3606 hidden and won't be exported.
3607
3608 @node Source Code Reference
3609 @subsection Source Code Reference
3610
3611 Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3612 intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3613 a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3614 symbol that does not have a value.
3615
3616 Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3617 transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3618 stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3619 prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3620 mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3621 of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3622 variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3623 linker script variable might be referred to as:
3624
3625 @smallexample
3626 extern int foo;
3627 @end smallexample
3628
3629 But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3630
3631 @smallexample
3632 _foo = 1000;
3633 @end smallexample
3634
3635 In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3636 transformation has taken place.
3637
3638 When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3639 things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3640 in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3641 second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3642 table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3643 contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3644 value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3645
3646 @smallexample
3647 int foo = 1000;
3648 @end smallexample
3649
3650 creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
3651 holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3652 number 1000 is initially stored.
3653
3654 When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3655 first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3656 memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3657 So:
3658
3659 @smallexample
3660 foo = 1;
3661 @end smallexample
3662
3663 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3664 associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3665 address. Whereas:
3666
3667 @smallexample
3668 int * a = & foo;
3669 @end smallexample
3670
3671 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
3672 and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3673 the variable @samp{a}.
3674
3675 Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3676 the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3677 an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3678
3679 @smallexample
3680 foo = 1000;
3681 @end smallexample
3682
3683 creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3684 the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3685 address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3686 linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3687 access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3688
3689 Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3690 you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3691 use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3692 section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3693 linker script contains these declarations:
3694
3695 @smallexample
3696 @group
3697 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3698 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
3699 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3700 @end group
3701 @end smallexample
3702
3703 Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3704
3705 @smallexample
3706 @group
3707 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
3708
3709 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3710 @end group
3711 @end smallexample
3712
3713 Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3714
3715 @node SECTIONS
3716 @section SECTIONS Command
3717 @kindex SECTIONS
3718 The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3719 into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3720
3721 The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3722 @smallexample
3723 SECTIONS
3724 @{
3725 @var{sections-command}
3726 @var{sections-command}
3727 @dots{}
3728 @}
3729 @end smallexample
3730
3731 Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3732
3733 @itemize @bullet
3734 @item
3735 an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3736 @item
3737 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3738 @item
3739 an output section description
3740 @item
3741 an overlay description
3742 @end itemize
3743
3744 The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3745 @code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3746 those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3747 understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3748 the layout of the output file.
3749
3750 Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3751 below.
3752
3753 If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3754 linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3755 section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3756 input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3757 example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3758 in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3759
3760 @menu
3761 * Output Section Description:: Output section description
3762 * Output Section Name:: Output section name
3763 * Output Section Address:: Output section address
3764 * Input Section:: Input section description
3765 * Output Section Data:: Output section data
3766 * Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3767 * Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3768 * Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3769 * Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3770 @end menu
3771
3772 @node Output Section Description
3773 @subsection Output Section Description
3774 The full description of an output section looks like this:
3775 @smallexample
3776 @group
3777 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
3778 [AT(@var{lma})]
3779 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
3780 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
3781 [@var{constraint}]
3782 @{
3783 @var{output-section-command}
3784 @var{output-section-command}
3785 @dots{}
3786 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
3787 @end group
3788 @end smallexample
3789
3790 Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
3791
3792 The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
3793 name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
3794 The line breaks and other white space are optional.
3795
3796 Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
3797
3798 @itemize @bullet
3799 @item
3800 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3801 @item
3802 an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
3803 @item
3804 data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
3805 @item
3806 a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
3807 @end itemize
3808
3809 @node Output Section Name
3810 @subsection Output Section Name
3811 @cindex name, section
3812 @cindex section name
3813 The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
3814 meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
3815 support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
3816 must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
3817 example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
3818 output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
3819 names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
3820 quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
3821 characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
3822 commas must be quoted.
3823
3824 The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
3825 Discarding}.
3826
3827 @node Output Section Address
3828 @subsection Output Section Address
3829 @cindex address, section
3830 @cindex section address
3831 The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
3832 address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
3833 is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
3834
3835 If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
3836 section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
3837 to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
3838 alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
3839 contained within the output section.
3840
3841 The output section address heuristic is as follows:
3842
3843 @itemize @bullet
3844 @item
3845 If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
3846 is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
3847 in that region.
3848
3849 @item
3850 If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
3851 regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
3852 section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
3853 be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
3854
3855 @item
3856 If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
3857 the output address will be based on the current value of the location
3858 counter.
3859 @end itemize
3860
3861 @noindent
3862 For example:
3863
3864 @smallexample
3865 .text . : @{ *(.text) @}
3866 @end smallexample
3867
3868 @noindent
3869 and
3870
3871 @smallexample
3872 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3873 @end smallexample
3874
3875 @noindent
3876 are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
3877 @samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
3878 counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
3879 counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
3880 input sections.
3881
3882 The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
3883 For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
3884 so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
3885 do something like this:
3886 @smallexample
3887 .text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
3888 @end smallexample
3889 @noindent
3890 This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
3891 aligned upward to the specified value.
3892
3893 Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
3894 location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
3895 sections are ignored).
3896
3897 @node Input Section
3898 @subsection Input Section Description
3899 @cindex input sections
3900 @cindex mapping input sections to output sections
3901 The most common output section command is an input section description.
3902
3903 The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
3904 You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
3905 in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
3906 map the input files into your memory layout.
3907
3908 @menu
3909 * Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
3910 * Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
3911 * Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
3912 * Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
3913 * Input Section Example:: Input section example
3914 @end menu
3915
3916 @node Input Section Basics
3917 @subsubsection Input Section Basics
3918 @cindex input section basics
3919 An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
3920 by a list of section names in parentheses.
3921
3922 The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
3923 describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
3924
3925 The most common input section description is to include all input
3926 sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
3927 include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
3928 @smallexample
3929 *(.text)
3930 @end smallexample
3931 @noindent
3932 Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
3933 of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
3934 match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
3935 example:
3936 @smallexample
3937 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
3938 @end smallexample
3939 will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
3940 @file{otherfile.o} to be included.
3941
3942 There are two ways to include more than one section:
3943 @smallexample
3944 *(.text .rdata)
3945 *(.text) *(.rdata)
3946 @end smallexample
3947 @noindent
3948 The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
3949 @samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
3950 first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
3951 they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
3952 @samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
3953 @samp{.rdata} input sections.
3954
3955 You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
3956 You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
3957 needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
3958 @smallexample
3959 data.o(.data)
3960 @end smallexample
3961
3962 To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
3963 of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
3964
3965 Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
3966
3967 @smallexample
3968 @group
3969 SECTIONS @{
3970 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
3971 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
3972 @}
3973 @end group
3974 @end smallexample
3975
3976 In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
3977 input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
3978 @code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
3979 @samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
3980 whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
3981
3982 You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
3983 matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
3984 with no whitespace around the colon.
3985
3986 @table @samp
3987 @item archive:file
3988 matches file within archive
3989 @item archive:
3990 matches the whole archive
3991 @item :file
3992 matches file but not one in an archive
3993 @end table
3994
3995 Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
3996 wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
3997 single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
3998 @samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
3999 within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4000 also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4001 other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4002 from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4003 command.
4004
4005 If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4006 the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4007 commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4008 @smallexample
4009 data.o
4010 @end smallexample
4011
4012 When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4013 and does not contain any wild card
4014 characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4015 name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4016 did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4017 though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4018 @code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4019 the archive search path.
4020
4021 @node Input Section Wildcards
4022 @subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
4023 @cindex input section wildcards
4024 @cindex wildcard file name patterns
4025 @cindex file name wildcard patterns
4026 @cindex section name wildcard patterns
4027 In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4028 name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4029
4030 The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4031 pattern for the file name.
4032
4033 The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4034
4035 @table @samp
4036 @item *
4037 matches any number of characters
4038 @item ?
4039 matches any single character
4040 @item [@var{chars}]
4041 matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4042 character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4043 @samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4044 @item \
4045 quotes the following character
4046 @end table
4047
4048 When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4049 will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4050 Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4051 exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4052 @samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4053 a @samp{/} character.
4054
4055 File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4056 specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4057 does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4058
4059 If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4060 appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4061 will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4062 sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4063 @file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4064 @smallexample
4065 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4066 .data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4067 @end smallexample
4068
4069 @cindex SORT_BY_NAME
4070 Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4071 in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
4072 this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4073 pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4074 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
4075 into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4076
4077 @cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4078 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4079 difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
4080 descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
4081 Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4082 reduce the amount of padding necessary.
4083
4084 @cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4085 @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4086 difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4087 ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4088 encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4089
4090 @cindex SORT
4091 @code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4092
4093 When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4094 can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4095
4096 @enumerate
4097 @item
4098 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4099 It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
4100 sections have the same name.
4101 @item
4102 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4103 It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
4104 sections have the same alignment.
4105 @item
4106 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
4107 treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4108 @item
4109 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4110 is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4111 @item
4112 All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4113 @end enumerate
4114
4115 When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4116 section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4117 takes precedence over the command line option.
4118
4119 If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4120 command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4121 treated as nested sorting command.
4122
4123 @enumerate
4124 @item
4125 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4126 @option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4127 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4128 @item
4129 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4130 @option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4131 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4132 @end enumerate
4133
4134 If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4135 command line option will be ignored.
4136
4137 @cindex SORT_NONE
4138 @code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4139 section sorting option.
4140
4141 If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4142 @samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4143 precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4144
4145 This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4146 files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4147 sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4148 The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4149 with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4150 linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4151 @smallexample
4152 @group
4153 SECTIONS @{
4154 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4155 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4156 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4157 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4158 @}
4159 @end group
4160 @end smallexample
4161
4162 @node Input Section Common
4163 @subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
4164 @cindex common symbol placement
4165 @cindex uninitialized data placement
4166 A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4167 file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4168 linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4169 named @samp{COMMON}.
4170
4171 You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4172 other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4173 particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4174 input files are placed in another section.
4175
4176 In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4177 @samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4178 @smallexample
4179 .bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4180 @end smallexample
4181
4182 @cindex scommon section
4183 @cindex small common symbols
4184 Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4185 example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4186 symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4187 different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4188 the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4189 symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4190 to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4191 locations.
4192
4193 @cindex [COMMON]
4194 You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4195 notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4196 @samp{*(COMMON)}.
4197
4198 @node Input Section Keep
4199 @subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
4200 @cindex KEEP
4201 @cindex garbage collection
4202 When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
4203 it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
4204 This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4205 with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
4206 @code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
4207
4208 @node Input Section Example
4209 @subsubsection Input Section Example
4210 The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4211 to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4212 start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4213 @samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4214 follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4215 @samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4216 @samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4217 All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4218 files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4219
4220 @smallexample
4221 @group
4222 SECTIONS @{
4223 outputa 0x10000 :
4224 @{
4225 all.o
4226 foo.o (.input1)
4227 @}
4228 @end group
4229 @group
4230 outputb :
4231 @{
4232 foo.o (.input2)
4233 foo1.o (.input1)
4234 @}
4235 @end group
4236 @group
4237 outputc :
4238 @{
4239 *(.input1)
4240 *(.input2)
4241 @}
4242 @}
4243 @end group
4244 @end smallexample
4245
4246 @node Output Section Data
4247 @subsection Output Section Data
4248 @cindex data
4249 @cindex section data
4250 @cindex output section data
4251 @kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4252 @kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4253 @kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4254 @kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4255 @kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4256 You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4257 @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4258 an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4259 parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4260 value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4261 counter.
4262
4263 The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4264 store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4265 bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4266 stored.
4267
4268 For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4269 of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4270 @smallexample
4271 BYTE(1)
4272 LONG(addr)
4273 @end smallexample
4274
4275 When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4276 same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4277 target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4278 @code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4279 @code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4280
4281 If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4282 which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4283 When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4284 true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4285 endianness of the first input object file.
4286
4287 Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
4288 between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4289 @smallexample
4290 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4291 @end smallexample
4292 whereas this will work:
4293 @smallexample
4294 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4295 @end smallexample
4296
4297 @kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4298 @cindex holes, filling
4299 @cindex unspecified memory
4300 You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4301 current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4302 otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4303 gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
4304 with the value of the expression, repeated as
4305 necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4306 point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4307 than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4308 different parts of an output section.
4309
4310 This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
4311 value @samp{0x90}:
4312 @smallexample
4313 FILL(0x90909090)
4314 @end smallexample
4315
4316 The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
4317 section attribute, but it only affects the
4318 part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4319 entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
4320 precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
4321 expression.
4322
4323 @node Output Section Keywords
4324 @subsection Output Section Keywords
4325 There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4326 commands.
4327
4328 @table @code
4329 @kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4330 @cindex input filename symbols
4331 @cindex filename symbols
4332 @item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4333 The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4334 The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4335 file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4336 the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4337
4338 This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4339 normally used for any other object file format.
4340
4341 @kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4342 @cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4343 @cindex constructors, arranging in link
4344 @item CONSTRUCTORS
4345 When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4346 unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4347 destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4348 arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4349 automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4350 For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4351 linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4352 @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4353 ignored for other object file formats.
4354
4355 The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
4356 constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4357 Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4358 the start and end of the global destructors. The
4359 first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4360 of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4361 compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4362 formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4363 @code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4364 the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4365 destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4366 @code{exit}.
4367
4368 For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4369 arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4370 addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4371 and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4372 linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4373 runtime code expects to see.
4374
4375 @smallexample
4376 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4377 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4378 *(.ctors)
4379 LONG(0)
4380 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4381 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4382 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4383 *(.dtors)
4384 LONG(0)
4385 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4386 @end smallexample
4387
4388 If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4389 which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4390 are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4391 are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
4392 command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4393 @code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4394 @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
4395 @samp{*(.dtors)}.
4396
4397 Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4398 and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4399 need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4400 scripts.
4401
4402 @end table
4403
4404 @node Output Section Discarding
4405 @subsection Output Section Discarding
4406 @cindex discarding sections
4407 @cindex sections, discarding
4408 @cindex removing sections
4409 The linker will not create output sections with no contents. This is
4410 for convenience when referring to input sections that may or may not
4411 be present in any of the input files. For example:
4412 @smallexample
4413 .foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
4414 @end smallexample
4415 @noindent
4416 will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
4417 @samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4418 sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4419 space in an output section will also create the output section.
4420
4421 The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
4422 on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4423 symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
4424 the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4425 section is discarded.
4426
4427 @cindex /DISCARD/
4428 The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4429 input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4430 section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4431
4432 @node Output Section Attributes
4433 @subsection Output Section Attributes
4434 @cindex output section attributes
4435 We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4436 like this:
4437
4438 @smallexample
4439 @group
4440 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4441 [AT(@var{lma})]
4442 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4443 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4444 [@var{constraint}]
4445 @{
4446 @var{output-section-command}
4447 @var{output-section-command}
4448 @dots{}
4449 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
4450 @end group
4451 @end smallexample
4452
4453 We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4454 @var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4455 remaining section attributes.
4456
4457 @menu
4458 * Output Section Type:: Output section type
4459 * Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
4460 * Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
4461 * Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
4462 * Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
4463 * Output Section Region:: Output section region
4464 * Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4465 * Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4466 @end menu
4467
4468 @node Output Section Type
4469 @subsubsection Output Section Type
4470 Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4471 parentheses. The following types are defined:
4472
4473 @table @code
4474 @item NOLOAD
4475 The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4476 loaded into memory when the program is run.
4477 @item DSECT
4478 @itemx COPY
4479 @itemx INFO
4480 @itemx OVERLAY
4481 These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4482 rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4483 marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4484 section when the program is run.
4485 @end table
4486
4487 @kindex NOLOAD
4488 @cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4489 @cindex loading, preventing
4490 The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4491 the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4492 the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4493 @samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
4494 need to be loaded when the program is run.
4495 @smallexample
4496 @group
4497 SECTIONS @{
4498 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4499 @dots{}
4500 @}
4501 @end group
4502 @end smallexample
4503
4504 @node Output Section LMA
4505 @subsubsection Output Section LMA
4506 @kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
4507 @kindex AT(@var{lma})
4508 @cindex load address
4509 @cindex section load address
4510 Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
4511 @ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4512 @pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4513 specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4514 address is optional.
4515
4516 The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4517 specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4518 takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4519 load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4520 region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
4521
4522 If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
4523 section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4524 load address:
4525
4526 @itemize @bullet
4527 @item
4528 If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4529 the LMA address as well.
4530
4531 @item
4532 If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4533
4534 @item
4535 Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4536 with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4537 section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4538 VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4539 the last section in the located region.
4540
4541 @item
4542 If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4543 that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4544
4545 @item
4546 If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4547 section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4548 @end itemize
4549
4550 @cindex ROM initialized data
4551 @cindex initialized data in ROM
4552 This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4553 example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4554 called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4555 @samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4556 even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4557 uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4558 defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4559 counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4560
4561 @smallexample
4562 @group
4563 SECTIONS
4564 @{
4565 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
4566 .mdata 0x2000 :
4567 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4568 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4569 .bss 0x3000 :
4570 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4571 @}
4572 @end group
4573 @end smallexample
4574
4575 The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4576 this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4577 the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4578 how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4579 script.
4580
4581 @smallexample
4582 @group
4583 extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4584 char *src = &_etext;
4585 char *dst = &_data;
4586
4587 /* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4588 while (dst < &_edata)
4589 *dst++ = *src++;
4590
4591 /* Zero bss. */
4592 for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4593 *dst = 0;
4594 @end group
4595 @end smallexample
4596
4597 @node Forced Output Alignment
4598 @subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4599 @kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4600 @cindex forcing output section alignment
4601 @cindex output section alignment
4602 You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
4603 alternative you can force the output section alignment to the maximum alignment
4604 of all its input sections with ALIGN_WITH_INPUT. The alignment forced by
4605 ALIGN_WITH_INPUT is used even in case the load and virtual memory regions are
4606 different.
4607
4608 @node Forced Input Alignment
4609 @subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4610 @kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4611 @cindex forcing input section alignment
4612 @cindex input section alignment
4613 You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4614 SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4615 sections, whether larger or smaller.
4616
4617 @node Output Section Constraint
4618 @subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4619 @kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4620 @kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4621 @cindex constraints on output sections
4622 You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4623 of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4624 read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4625 @code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4626
4627 @node Output Section Region
4628 @subsubsection Output Section Region
4629 @kindex >@var{region}
4630 @cindex section, assigning to memory region
4631 @cindex memory regions and sections
4632 You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4633 using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4634
4635 Here is a simple example:
4636 @smallexample
4637 @group
4638 MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4639 SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4640 @end group
4641 @end smallexample
4642
4643 @node Output Section Phdr
4644 @subsubsection Output Section Phdr
4645 @kindex :@var{phdr}
4646 @cindex section, assigning to program header
4647 @cindex program headers and sections
4648 You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4649 using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4650 one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4651 assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4652 @code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4653 linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4654
4655 Here is a simple example:
4656 @smallexample
4657 @group
4658 PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4659 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4660 @end group
4661 @end smallexample
4662
4663 @node Output Section Fill
4664 @subsubsection Output Section Fill
4665 @kindex =@var{fillexp}
4666 @cindex section fill pattern
4667 @cindex fill pattern, entire section
4668 You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4669 @samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4670 (@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4671 within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
4672 alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4673 necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
4674 of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
4675 an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4676 fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
4677 other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
4678 pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4679 expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
4680
4681 You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
4682 output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
4683
4684 Here is a simple example:
4685 @smallexample
4686 @group
4687 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
4688 @end group
4689 @end smallexample
4690
4691 @node Overlay Description
4692 @subsection Overlay Description
4693 @kindex OVERLAY
4694 @cindex overlays
4695 An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4696 are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4697 the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4698 copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4699 required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4700 can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4701 than another.
4702
4703 Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4704 @code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4705 output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4706 command is as follows:
4707 @smallexample
4708 @group
4709 OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4710 @{
4711 @var{secname1}
4712 @{
4713 @var{output-section-command}
4714 @var{output-section-command}
4715 @dots{}
4716 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4717 @var{secname2}
4718 @{
4719 @var{output-section-command}
4720 @var{output-section-command}
4721 @dots{}
4722 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4723 @dots{}
4724 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4725 @end group
4726 @end smallexample
4727
4728 Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4729 section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4730 section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
4731 those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
4732 except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4733 sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4734
4735 The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4736 addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4737 memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4738 whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4739 and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4740 and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4741
4742 If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
4743 references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
4744 the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
4745 sense for one section to refer directly to another.
4746 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
4747
4748 For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
4749 provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
4750 defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4751 @code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4752 the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4753 within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4754 symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4755
4756 At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4757 the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4758
4759 Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4760 @code{SECTIONS} construct.
4761 @smallexample
4762 @group
4763 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4764 @{
4765 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4766 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4767 @}
4768 @end group
4769 @end smallexample
4770 @noindent
4771 This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4772 address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4773 @samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
4774 following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
4775 @code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4776 @code{__load_stop_text1}.
4777
4778 C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
4779 like the following.
4780
4781 @smallexample
4782 @group
4783 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
4784 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
4785 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
4786 @end group
4787 @end smallexample
4788
4789 Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
4790 everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
4791 example could have been written identically as follows.
4792
4793 @smallexample
4794 @group
4795 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4796 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
4797 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
4798 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4799 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
4800 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
4801 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
4802 @end group
4803 @end smallexample
4804
4805 @node MEMORY
4806 @section MEMORY Command
4807 @kindex MEMORY
4808 @cindex memory regions
4809 @cindex regions of memory
4810 @cindex allocating memory
4811 @cindex discontinuous memory
4812 The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
4813 memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
4814
4815 The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
4816 memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
4817 may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
4818 can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
4819 set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
4820 regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
4821 around to fit into the available regions.
4822
4823 A linker script may contain at most one use of the @code{MEMORY}
4824 command. However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as
4825 you wish. The syntax is:
4826 @smallexample
4827 @group
4828 MEMORY
4829 @{
4830 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
4831 @dots{}
4832 @}
4833 @end group
4834 @end smallexample
4835
4836 The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
4837 region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
4838 Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4839 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4840 must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
4841 add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
4842 command.
4843
4844 @cindex memory region attributes
4845 The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
4846 whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
4847 not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
4848 @ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
4849 section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
4850 the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
4851 them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
4852
4853 The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
4854 @table @samp
4855 @item R
4856 Read-only section
4857 @item W
4858 Read/write section
4859 @item X
4860 Executable section
4861 @item A
4862 Allocatable section
4863 @item I
4864 Initialized section
4865 @item L
4866 Same as @samp{I}
4867 @item !
4868 Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
4869 @end table
4870
4871 If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
4872 @samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
4873 attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
4874 in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
4875 attributes.
4876
4877 @kindex ORIGIN =
4878 @kindex o =
4879 @kindex org =
4880 The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
4881 the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
4882 cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
4883 abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
4884 @code{ORG}).
4885
4886 @kindex LENGTH =
4887 @kindex len =
4888 @kindex l =
4889 The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
4890 region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
4891 be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
4892 @code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
4893
4894 In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
4895 available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
4896 and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
4897 linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
4898 is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
4899 or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
4900 explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
4901 region.
4902
4903 @smallexample
4904 @group
4905 MEMORY
4906 @{
4907 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
4908 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
4909 @}
4910 @end group
4911 @end smallexample
4912
4913 Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
4914 specific output sections into that memory region by using the
4915 @samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
4916 a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
4917 output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
4918 was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
4919 the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
4920 output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
4921 region, the linker will issue an error message.
4922
4923 It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
4924 expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
4925 @code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
4926
4927 @smallexample
4928 @group
4929 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
4930 @end group
4931 @end smallexample
4932
4933 @node PHDRS
4934 @section PHDRS Command
4935 @kindex PHDRS
4936 @cindex program headers
4937 @cindex ELF program headers
4938 @cindex program segments
4939 @cindex segments, ELF
4940 The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
4941 @dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
4942 loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
4943 program with the @samp{-p} option.
4944
4945 When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
4946 reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
4947 program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
4948 This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
4949 interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
4950
4951 The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
4952 in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
4953 precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
4954 the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
4955 not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
4956
4957 The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
4958 generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
4959 ignore @code{PHDRS}.
4960
4961 This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
4962 @code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
4963
4964 @smallexample
4965 @group
4966 PHDRS
4967 @{
4968 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
4969 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
4970 @}
4971 @end group
4972 @end smallexample
4973
4974 The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
4975 of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
4976 header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4977 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
4978 must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
4979 is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
4980
4981 Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
4982 system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
4983 specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
4984 sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
4985 attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
4986 Section Phdr}.
4987
4988 It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
4989 merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
4990 repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
4991 contain the section.
4992
4993 If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
4994 then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
4995 not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
4996 convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
4997 placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
4998 default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
4999 segment at all.
5000
5001 @kindex FILEHDR
5002 @kindex PHDRS
5003 You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
5004 the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5005 The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5006 file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5007 include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
5008 segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5009 these keywords.
5010
5011 The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5012 value of the keyword.
5013
5014 @table @asis
5015 @item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5016 Indicates an unused program header.
5017
5018 @item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5019 Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5020 the file.
5021
5022 @item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5023 Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5024
5025 @item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5026 Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5027 found.
5028
5029 @item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5030 Indicates a segment holding note information.
5031
5032 @item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5033 A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5034 ABI.
5035
5036 @item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5037 Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5038
5039 @item @var{expression}
5040 An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5041 be used for types not defined above.
5042 @end table
5043
5044 You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5045 in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5046 @code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5047 Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5048 output section attribute.
5049
5050 The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5051 which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5052 explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5053 an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5054 header.
5055
5056 Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5057 headers used on a native ELF system.
5058
5059 @example
5060 @group
5061 PHDRS
5062 @{
5063 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5064 interp PT_INTERP ;
5065 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5066 data PT_LOAD ;
5067 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5068 @}
5069
5070 SECTIONS
5071 @{
5072 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5073 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5074 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5075 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5076 @dots{}
5077 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5078 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5079 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5080 @dots{}
5081 @}
5082 @end group
5083 @end example
5084
5085 @node VERSION
5086 @section VERSION Command
5087 @kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5088 @cindex symbol versions
5089 @cindex version script
5090 @cindex versions of symbols
5091 The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5092 only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5093 symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5094 a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5095 shared library.
5096
5097 You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5098 you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5099 also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5100
5101 The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5102 @smallexample
5103 VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5104 @end smallexample
5105
5106 The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5107 Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5108 version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5109 version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5110 version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5111 scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5112 library.
5113
5114 The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5115 examples.
5116
5117 @smallexample
5118 VERS_1.1 @{
5119 global:
5120 foo1;
5121 local:
5122 old*;
5123 original*;
5124 new*;
5125 @};
5126
5127 VERS_1.2 @{
5128 foo2;
5129 @} VERS_1.1;
5130
5131 VERS_2.0 @{
5132 bar1; bar2;
5133 extern "C++" @{
5134 ns::*;
5135 "f(int, double)";
5136 @};
5137 @} VERS_1.2;
5138 @end smallexample
5139
5140 This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5141 version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5142 The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5143 a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
5144 of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5145 symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5146 is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5147 in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
5148 However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5149 name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
5150
5151 Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5152 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5153 to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5154
5155 Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5156 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5157 and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5158
5159 When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5160 specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5161 unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
5162 unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
5163 somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5164 wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5165 wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5166 set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5167 ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
5168
5169 The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5170 they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5171 could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5172 However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5173
5174 Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
5175 in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5176 symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5177 won't.
5178
5179 @smallexample
5180 @{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
5181 @end smallexample
5182
5183 When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5184 symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5185 requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5186 shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5187 loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5188 linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5189 application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5190 way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5191 all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5192 search for each symbol reference.
5193
5194 The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5195 doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5196 that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5197 functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5198 the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5199 required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5200 that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5201 versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5202 the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5203
5204 There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5205 first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5206 source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5207 script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5208 maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5209 @smallexample
5210 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5211 @end smallexample
5212 @noindent
5213 in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5214 be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5215 The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
5216 @samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5217 takes precedence over a version script.
5218
5219 The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5220 function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5221 an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5222 version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5223 linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5224
5225 To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5226 source file. Here is an example:
5227
5228 @smallexample
5229 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5230 __asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5231 __asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5232 __asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5233 @end smallexample
5234
5235 In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5236 unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5237 example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5238 @samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5239
5240 When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5241 some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5242 this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5243 @samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5244 declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5245 you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5246
5247 If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5248 within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
5249 (i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
5250 specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5251
5252 You can also specify the language in the version script:
5253
5254 @smallexample
5255 VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5256 @end smallexample
5257
5258 The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
5259 The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5260 demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
5261 patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5262 @samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
5263
5264 Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5265 described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5266 or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5267 the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5268 whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5269 cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5270 might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5271 should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5272 expect when you upgrade.
5273
5274 @node Expressions
5275 @section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5276 @cindex expressions
5277 @cindex arithmetic
5278 The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5279 that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5280 expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5281 host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5282
5283 You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5284
5285 The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5286 expressions.
5287
5288 @menu
5289 * Constants:: Constants
5290 * Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
5291 * Symbols:: Symbol Names
5292 * Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
5293 * Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5294 * Operators:: Operators
5295 * Evaluation:: Evaluation
5296 * Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5297 * Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5298 @end menu
5299
5300 @node Constants
5301 @subsection Constants
5302 @cindex integer notation
5303 @cindex constants in linker scripts
5304 All constants are integers.
5305
5306 As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5307 octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
5308 hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
5309 @samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
5310 @samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5311 value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
5312
5313 @cindex scaled integers
5314 @cindex K and M integer suffixes
5315 @cindex M and K integer suffixes
5316 @cindex suffixes for integers
5317 @cindex integer suffixes
5318 In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5319 constant by
5320 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5321 @ifnottex
5322 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5323 @code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5324 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5325 @end ifnottex
5326 @tex
5327 ${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5328 @end tex
5329 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5330 respectively. For example, the following
5331 all refer to the same quantity:
5332
5333 @smallexample
5334 _fourk_1 = 4K;
5335 _fourk_2 = 4096;
5336 _fourk_3 = 0x1000;
5337 _fourk_4 = 10000o;
5338 @end smallexample
5339
5340 Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5341 conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5342
5343 @node Symbolic Constants
5344 @subsection Symbolic Constants
5345 @cindex symbolic constants
5346 @kindex CONSTANT
5347 It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5348 the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5349
5350 @table @code
5351 @item MAXPAGESIZE
5352 @kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5353 The target's maximum page size.
5354
5355 @item COMMONPAGESIZE
5356 @kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5357 The target's default page size.
5358 @end table
5359
5360 So for example:
5361
5362 @smallexample
5363 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
5364 @end smallexample
5365
5366 will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5367 supported by the target.
5368
5369 @node Symbols
5370 @subsection Symbol Names
5371 @cindex symbol names
5372 @cindex names
5373 @cindex quoted symbol names
5374 @kindex "
5375 Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5376 and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5377 Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5378 specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5379 keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5380 @smallexample
5381 "SECTION" = 9;
5382 "with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
5383 @end smallexample
5384
5385 Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5386 to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5387 whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5388
5389 @node Orphan Sections
5390 @subsection Orphan Sections
5391 @cindex orphan
5392 Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5393 are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5394 script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5395 output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5396 placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5397 attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5398 same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5399 If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5400 at the end of the file.
5401
5402 For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5403 well as section flag.
5404
5405 If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
5406 the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
5407 __start_SECNAME and __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
5408 section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5409 orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5410 representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5411 character.
5412
5413 @node Location Counter
5414 @subsection The Location Counter
5415 @kindex .
5416 @cindex dot
5417 @cindex location counter
5418 @cindex current output location
5419 The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5420 current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5421 location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5422 within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5423 anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5424
5425 @cindex holes
5426 Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5427 moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
5428 location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5429 and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5430 doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
5431
5432 @smallexample
5433 SECTIONS
5434 @{
5435 output :
5436 @{
5437 file1(.text)
5438 . = . + 1000;
5439 file2(.text)
5440 . += 1000;
5441 file3(.text)
5442 @} = 0x12345678;
5443 @}
5444 @end smallexample
5445 @noindent
5446 In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5447 located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5448 followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5449 @file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
5450 @samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
5451 specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5452
5453 @cindex dot inside sections
5454 Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5455 current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
5456 statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5457 absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5458 however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5459 not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5460
5461 @smallexample
5462 SECTIONS
5463 @{
5464 . = 0x100
5465 .text: @{
5466 *(.text)
5467 . = 0x200
5468 @}
5469 . = 0x500
5470 .data: @{
5471 *(.data)
5472 . += 0x600
5473 @}
5474 @}
5475 @end smallexample
5476
5477 The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5478 and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5479 the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5480 much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5481 move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5482 and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5483 the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5484 the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5485
5486 @cindex dot outside sections
5487 Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5488 output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5489 needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5490
5491 @smallexample
5492 SECTIONS
5493 @{
5494 start_of_text = . ;
5495 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5496 end_of_text = . ;
5497
5498 start_of_data = . ;
5499 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5500 end_of_data = . ;
5501 @}
5502 @end smallexample
5503
5504 If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5505 not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5506 between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5507 should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5508 blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5509 the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5510 sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5511 statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5512 special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5513 place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5514 as follows:
5515
5516 @smallexample
5517 SECTIONS
5518 @{
5519 start_of_text = . ;
5520 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5521 end_of_text = . ;
5522
5523 start_of_data = . ;
5524 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5525 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5526 end_of_data = . ;
5527 @}
5528 @end smallexample
5529
5530 This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5531 @code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5532 placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5533 assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5534 a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5535 section. So you could write:
5536
5537 @smallexample
5538 SECTIONS
5539 @{
5540 start_of_text = . ;
5541 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5542 end_of_text = . ;
5543
5544 . = . ;
5545 start_of_data = . ;
5546 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5547 end_of_data = . ;
5548 @}
5549 @end smallexample
5550
5551 Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5552 @code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5553
5554 @need 2000
5555 @node Operators
5556 @subsection Operators
5557 @cindex operators for arithmetic
5558 @cindex arithmetic operators
5559 @cindex precedence in expressions
5560 The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5561 the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5562 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5563 @ifnottex
5564 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5565 @smallexample
5566 precedence associativity Operators Notes
5567 (highest)
5568 1 left ! - ~ (1)
5569 2 left * / %
5570 3 left + -
5571 4 left >> <<
5572 5 left == != > < <= >=
5573 6 left &
5574 7 left |
5575 8 left &&
5576 9 left ||
5577 10 right ? :
5578 11 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5579 (lowest)
5580 @end smallexample
5581 Notes:
5582 (1) Prefix operators
5583 (2) @xref{Assignments}.
5584 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5585 @end ifnottex
5586 @tex
5587 \vskip \baselineskip
5588 %"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5589 \hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5590 \hrule
5591 \halign
5592 {\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5593 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5594 &Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5595 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5596 \noalign{\hrule}
5597 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5598 &highest&&&&&\cr
5599 % '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
5600 &1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
5601 &2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5602 &3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5603 &4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5604 &5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5605 &6&&left&&\&&\cr
5606 &7&&left&&|&\cr
5607 &8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5608 &9&&left&&||&\cr
5609 &10&&right&&? :&\cr
5610 &11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5611 &lowest&&&&&\cr
5612 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5613 \hrule}
5614 @end tex
5615 @iftex
5616 {
5617 @obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5618 @dag@quad Prefix operators.
5619 @ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5620 }
5621 @end iftex
5622 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5623
5624 @node Evaluation
5625 @subsection Evaluation
5626 @cindex lazy evaluation
5627 @cindex expression evaluation order
5628 The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5629 an expression when absolutely necessary.
5630
5631 The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5632 address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5633 regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5634 as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5635
5636 However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5637 until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5638 other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5639 for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5640
5641 The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5642 assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5643 allocation.
5644
5645 Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5646 @samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5647
5648 If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5649 available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5650 following
5651 @smallexample
5652 @group
5653 SECTIONS
5654 @{
5655 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
5656 @{ *(.text) @}
5657 @}
5658 @end group
5659 @end smallexample
5660 @noindent
5661 will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5662 address}.
5663
5664 @node Expression Section
5665 @subsection The Section of an Expression
5666 @cindex expression sections
5667 @cindex absolute expressions
5668 @cindex relative expressions
5669 @cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5670 @cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5671 @cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
5672 Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
5673 relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
5674 using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
5675 value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
5676 symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
5677 operations.
5678
5679 Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
5680 section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
5681 address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
5682 @code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
5683 functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
5684 One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
5685 (@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5686 differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
5687 versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
5688 section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
5689 Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
5690 absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
5691 given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
5692 everywhere.
5693
5694 In the following simple example,
5695
5696 @smallexample
5697 @group
5698 SECTIONS
5699 @{
5700 . = 0x100;
5701 __executable_start = 0x100;
5702 .data :
5703 @{
5704 . = 0x10;
5705 __data_start = 0x10;
5706 *(.data)
5707 @}
5708 @dots{}
5709 @}
5710 @end group
5711 @end smallexample
5712
5713 both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
5714 address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
5715 @code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
5716 section in the second two assignments.
5717
5718 For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
5719 addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
5720
5721 @itemize @bullet
5722 @item
5723 Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
5724 operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
5725 absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
5726 @item
5727 Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
5728 relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
5729 and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
5730 @item
5731 Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
5732 in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
5733 address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
5734 before applying the operator.
5735 @end itemize
5736
5737 The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
5738
5739 @itemize @bullet
5740 @item
5741 An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
5742 @item
5743 The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
5744 @item
5745 The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
5746 relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
5747 (after above conversions) is also a number.
5748 @item
5749 The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
5750 relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
5751 section as the relative operand(s).
5752 @item
5753 The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
5754 conversions) is an absolute address.
5755 @end itemize
5756
5757 You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5758 to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5759 create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5760 section @samp{.data}:
5761 @smallexample
5762 SECTIONS
5763 @{
5764 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5765 @}
5766 @end smallexample
5767 @noindent
5768 If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5769 @samp{.data} section.
5770
5771 Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
5772 particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
5773
5774 @node Builtin Functions
5775 @subsection Builtin Functions
5776 @cindex functions in expressions
5777 The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
5778 use in linker script expressions.
5779
5780 @table @code
5781 @item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5782 @kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5783 @cindex expression, absolute
5784 Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
5785 of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
5786 value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
5787 normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
5788
5789 @item ADDR(@var{section})
5790 @kindex ADDR(@var{section})
5791 @cindex section address in expression
5792 Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
5793 script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
5794 the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
5795 @code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
5796 @code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
5797 the other two will be absolute:
5798 @smallexample
5799 @group
5800 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5801 .output1 :
5802 @{
5803 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
5804 @dots{}
5805 @}
5806 .output :
5807 @{
5808 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
5809 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
5810 @}
5811 @dots{} @}
5812 @end group
5813 @end smallexample
5814
5815 @item ALIGN(@var{align})
5816 @itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5817 @kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
5818 @kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5819 @cindex round up location counter
5820 @cindex align location counter
5821 @cindex round up expression
5822 @cindex align expression
5823 Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
5824 to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
5825 doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
5826 arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
5827 expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
5828 equivalent to @code{ALIGN(., @var{align})}).
5829
5830 Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
5831 next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
5832 variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
5833 input sections:
5834 @smallexample
5835 @group
5836 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5837 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
5838 *(.data)
5839 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
5840 @}
5841 @dots{} @}
5842 @end group
5843 @end smallexample
5844 @noindent
5845 The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
5846 a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
5847 a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
5848 of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
5849
5850 The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
5851
5852 @item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5853 @kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5854 @cindex section alignment
5855 Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5856 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5857 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5858 the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
5859 value in that section.
5860 @smallexample
5861 @group
5862 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5863 .output @{
5864 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
5865 @dots{}
5866 @}
5867 @dots{} @}
5868 @end group
5869 @end smallexample
5870
5871 @item BLOCK(@var{exp})
5872 @kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
5873 This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
5874 scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
5875 section.
5876
5877 @item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5878 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5879 This is equivalent to either
5880 @smallexample
5881 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
5882 @end smallexample
5883 or
5884 @smallexample
5885 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
5886 @end smallexample
5887 @noindent
5888 depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
5889 for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
5890 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
5891 If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
5892 memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
5893 bytes in the on-disk file.
5894
5895 This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
5896 any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
5897 @var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
5898 be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
5899 working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
5900
5901 @noindent
5902 Example:
5903 @smallexample
5904 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
5905 @end smallexample
5906
5907 @item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5908 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5909 This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
5910 evaluation purposes.
5911
5912 @smallexample
5913 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
5914 @end smallexample
5915
5916 @item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5917 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5918 This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
5919 @samp{-z relro} option is used. Second argument is returned.
5920 When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
5921 does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
5922 @var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
5923 boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
5924 it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
5925 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}.
5926
5927 @smallexample
5928 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
5929 @end smallexample
5930
5931 @item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5932 @kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5933 @cindex symbol defaults
5934 Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
5935 defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
5936 return 0. You can use this function to provide
5937 default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
5938 shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
5939 the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
5940 existed, its value is preserved:
5941
5942 @smallexample
5943 @group
5944 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5945 .text : @{
5946 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
5947 @dots{}
5948 @}
5949 @dots{}
5950 @}
5951 @end group
5952 @end smallexample
5953
5954 @item LENGTH(@var{memory})
5955 @kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
5956 Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5957
5958 @item LOADADDR(@var{section})
5959 @kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
5960 @cindex section load address in expression
5961 Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
5962 Section LMA}).
5963
5964 @item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
5965 @kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
5966 Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
5967 @code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
5968
5969 @kindex MAX
5970 @item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5971 Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5972
5973 @kindex MIN
5974 @item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5975 Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5976
5977 @item NEXT(@var{exp})
5978 @kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
5979 @cindex unallocated address, next
5980 Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
5981 This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
5982 use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
5983 output file, the two functions are equivalent.
5984
5985 @item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5986 @kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5987 Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5988
5989 @item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5990 @kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5991 Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
5992 value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
5993 @samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
5994 will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
5995 can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
5996 ``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
5997 name.
5998
5999 @item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6000 @kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6001 @cindex section size
6002 Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6003 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6004 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6005 @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6006 @smallexample
6007 @group
6008 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6009 .output @{
6010 .start = . ;
6011 @dots{}
6012 .end = . ;
6013 @}
6014 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6015 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6016 @dots{} @}
6017 @end group
6018 @end smallexample
6019
6020 @item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6021 @itemx sizeof_headers
6022 @kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6023 @cindex header size
6024 Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6025 information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6026 this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6027 choose, to facilitate paging.
6028
6029 @cindex not enough room for program headers
6030 @cindex program headers, not enough room
6031 When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6032 @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6033 number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6034 addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6035 additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6036 room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6037 the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6038 script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6039 you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6040 command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6041 @end table
6042
6043 @node Implicit Linker Scripts
6044 @section Implicit Linker Scripts
6045 @cindex implicit linker scripts
6046 If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6047 an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6048 linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6049 linker will report an error.
6050
6051 An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6052
6053 Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6054 assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6055 commands.
6056
6057 Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6058 at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6059 read. This can affect archive searching.
6060
6061 @ifset GENERIC
6062 @node Machine Dependent
6063 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
6064
6065 @cindex machine dependencies
6066 @command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6067 sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
6068 functionality are not listed.
6069
6070 @menu
6071 @ifset H8300
6072 * H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6073 @end ifset
6074 @ifset I960
6075 * i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
6076 @end ifset
6077 @ifset M68HC11
6078 * M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6079 @end ifset
6080 @ifset ARM
6081 * ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6082 @end ifset
6083 @ifset HPPA
6084 * HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6085 @end ifset
6086 @ifset M68K
6087 * M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6088 @end ifset
6089 @ifset MIPS
6090 * MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6091 @end ifset
6092 @ifset MMIX
6093 * MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
6094 @end ifset
6095 @ifset MSP430
6096 * MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
6097 @end ifset
6098 @ifset NDS32
6099 * NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6100 @end ifset
6101 @ifset POWERPC
6102 * PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6103 @end ifset
6104 @ifset POWERPC64
6105 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6106 @end ifset
6107 @ifset SPU
6108 * SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6109 @end ifset
6110 @ifset TICOFF
6111 * TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
6112 @end ifset
6113 @ifset WIN32
6114 * WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6115 @end ifset
6116 @ifset XTENSA
6117 * Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6118 @end ifset
6119 @end menu
6120 @end ifset
6121
6122 @ifset H8300
6123 @ifclear GENERIC
6124 @raisesections
6125 @end ifclear
6126
6127 @node H8/300
6128 @section @command{ld} and the H8/300
6129
6130 @cindex H8/300 support
6131 For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
6132 you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6133
6134 @table @emph
6135 @cindex relaxing on H8/300
6136 @item relaxing address modes
6137 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6138 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6139 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6140 respectively.
6141
6142 @cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6143 @item synthesizing instructions
6144 @c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
6145 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
6146 sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6147 page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6148 (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6149 @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6150 top page of memory).
6151
6152 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6153 indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6154 displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6155 the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6156 @code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6157 whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6158 range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6159
6160 @item bit manipulation instructions
6161 @command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
6162 biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
6163 which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6164 page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6165 (That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
6166 @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6167 the top page of memory).
6168
6169 @item system control instructions
6170 @command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
6171 32 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
6172 changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6173 (That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
6174 @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6175 the top page of memory).
6176 @end table
6177
6178 @ifclear GENERIC
6179 @lowersections
6180 @end ifclear
6181 @end ifset
6182
6183 @ifclear GENERIC
6184 @ifset Renesas
6185 @c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
6186 @c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6187 @node Renesas
6188 @chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
6189
6190 @command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6191 H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6192 options are required for these chips.
6193 @end ifset
6194 @end ifclear
6195
6196 @ifset I960
6197 @ifclear GENERIC
6198 @raisesections
6199 @end ifclear
6200
6201 @node i960
6202 @section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6203
6204 @cindex i960 support
6205
6206 You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6207 specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6208 family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6209 incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6210 linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6211 libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6212 search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6213
6214 For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6215 well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6216 paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6217 the names
6218
6219 @smallexample
6220 @group
6221 try
6222 libtry.a
6223 tryca
6224 libtryca.a
6225 @end group
6226 @end smallexample
6227
6228 @noindent
6229 The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6230 two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6231
6232 You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6233 the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6234 use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6235 specifies a library.
6236
6237 @cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6238 @cindex relaxing on i960
6239 @command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6240 you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6241 @code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6242 them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6243 instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6244 instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6245 target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6246 not itself call any subroutines).
6247
6248 @cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6249 @kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6250 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6251 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6252
6253 The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6254
6255 @kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6256 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6257 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6258
6259 @ifclear GENERIC
6260 @lowersections
6261 @end ifclear
6262 @end ifset
6263
6264 @ifset ARM
6265 @ifclear GENERIC
6266 @raisesections
6267 @end ifclear
6268
6269 @ifset M68HC11
6270 @ifclear GENERIC
6271 @raisesections
6272 @end ifclear
6273
6274 @node M68HC11/68HC12
6275 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6276
6277 @cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6278
6279 @subsection Linker Relaxation
6280
6281 For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6282 optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6283
6284 @table @emph
6285 @cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6286 @item relaxing address modes
6287 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6288 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6289 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6290 respectively.
6291
6292 @command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6293 transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6294 page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6295
6296 @item relaxing gcc instruction group
6297 When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6298 of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6299 addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6300 @code{bset} instructions.
6301
6302 @end table
6303
6304 @subsection Trampoline Generation
6305
6306 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6307 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6308 For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6309 call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
6310 will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
6311 trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6312 case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6313 point to the function trampoline.
6314
6315 @ifclear GENERIC
6316 @lowersections
6317 @end ifclear
6318 @end ifset
6319
6320 @node ARM
6321 @section @command{ld} and the ARM family
6322
6323 @cindex ARM interworking support
6324 @kindex --support-old-code
6325 For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
6326 between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
6327 been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6328 line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6329 libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6330 option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6331 given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6332 which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6333 the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6334 non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6335
6336 @cindex thumb entry point
6337 @cindex entry point, thumb
6338 @kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6339 The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6340 @samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6341 But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6342 branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6343 executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6344
6345 @cindex PE import table prefixing
6346 @kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6347 The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6348 the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
6349 element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
6350 import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6351
6352 @cindex BE8
6353 @kindex --be8
6354 The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6355 executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.
6356 The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
6357
6358 @cindex TARGET1
6359 @kindex --target1-rel
6360 @kindex --target1-abs
6361 The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6362 @samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6363 or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6364 and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6365
6366 @cindex TARGET2
6367 @kindex --target2=@var{type}
6368 The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6369 @samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6370 meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6371 @table @samp
6372 @item rel
6373 @samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6374 @item abs
6375 @samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
6376 @item got-rel
6377 @samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6378 @end table
6379
6380 @cindex FIX_V4BX
6381 @kindex --fix-v4bx
6382 The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6383 specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6384 interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6385 also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6386
6387 In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6388 linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6389 @code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6390
6391 In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6392 relocations are ignored.
6393
6394 @cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6395 @kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6396 Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6397 relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6398
6399 @smallexample
6400 TST rM, #1
6401 MOVEQ PC, rM
6402 BX Rn
6403 @end smallexample
6404
6405 This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6406 and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
6407 condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
6408
6409 @cindex USE_BLX
6410 @kindex --use-blx
6411 The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6412 BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6413 situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6414 code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6415 each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6416
6417 This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6418 specify it if you are using that target.
6419
6420 @cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6421 @kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6422 The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6423 bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6424 instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6425 to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6426 the support code can read the intended values.
6427
6428 The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6429 intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6430 and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6431 intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6432 full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6433 you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6434
6435 If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6436 enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6437 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6438 mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6439 vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6440 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6441
6442 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6443 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6444 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6445 first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6446 instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6447 the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6448 are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6449
6450 @cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6451 @kindex --fix-arm1176
6452 @kindex --no-fix-arm1176
6453 The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6454 in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6455 are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
6456 unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6457
6458 Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
6459 Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
6460 http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6461
6462 @cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6463 @kindex --no-enum-size-warning
6464 The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6465 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6466 enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6467 linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6468 using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6469 not be diagnosed.
6470
6471 @cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6472 @kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6473 The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6474 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6475 @code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6476 linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6477 using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
6478
6479 @cindex PIC_VENEER
6480 @kindex --pic-veneer
6481 The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6482 ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6483 is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6484 @samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6485
6486 @cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6487 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6488 The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6489 code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6490 perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6491 placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6492 controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6493 The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
6494 duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
6495 group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6496 code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6497 where they should be placed.
6498
6499 The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6500 @option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
6501 placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
6502 branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6503 placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6504 value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6505 exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6506 A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6507 linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6508 from the input sections.
6509
6510 The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6511 @samp{N = +1}.
6512
6513 Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6514 only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6515 otherwise.
6516
6517 @ifclear GENERIC
6518 @lowersections
6519 @end ifclear
6520 @end ifset
6521
6522 @ifset HPPA
6523 @ifclear GENERIC
6524 @raisesections
6525 @end ifclear
6526
6527 @node HPPA ELF32
6528 @section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6529 @cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6530 @kindex --multi-subspace
6531 When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6532 import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6533 The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6534 stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6535 multiple sub-spaces.
6536
6537 @cindex HPPA stub grouping
6538 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6539 Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6540 stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6541 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6542 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6543 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6544 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6545 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6546 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6547 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6548 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6549 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6550 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6551 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6552 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6553
6554 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6555 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6556 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6557 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6558
6559 @ifclear GENERIC
6560 @lowersections
6561 @end ifclear
6562 @end ifset
6563
6564 @ifset M68K
6565 @ifclear GENERIC
6566 @raisesections
6567 @end ifclear
6568
6569 @node M68K
6570 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6571
6572 @cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6573 @kindex --got=@var{type}
6574 The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6575 The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6576 @samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6577 the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6578 @samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6579 entries only at non-negative offsets.
6580 @samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6581 entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6582 support such GOTs.
6583 @samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6584 output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6585 file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6586 files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6587
6588 @ifclear GENERIC
6589 @lowersections
6590 @end ifclear
6591 @end ifset
6592
6593 @ifset MIPS
6594 @ifclear GENERIC
6595 @raisesections
6596 @end ifclear
6597
6598 @node MIPS
6599 @section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6600
6601 @cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
6602 @kindex --insn32
6603 @kindex --no-insn32
6604 The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
6605 microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
6606 in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
6607 used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
6608 or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
6609 including 16-bit ones where possible.
6610
6611 @ifclear GENERIC
6612 @lowersections
6613 @end ifclear
6614 @end ifset
6615
6616 @ifset MMIX
6617 @ifclear GENERIC
6618 @raisesections
6619 @end ifclear
6620
6621 @node MMIX
6622 @section @code{ld} and MMIX
6623 For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6624 @code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
6625 understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6626 can translate between the two formats.
6627
6628 There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6629 Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6630 registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6631 equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
6632 @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6633 global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
6634 this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6635 symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6636
6637 Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6638 @code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6639 The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6640 of a section.
6641
6642 Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
6643 are left out from an mmo file.
6644
6645 @ifclear GENERIC
6646 @lowersections
6647 @end ifclear
6648 @end ifset
6649
6650 @ifset MSP430
6651 @ifclear GENERIC
6652 @raisesections
6653 @end ifclear
6654
6655 @node MSP430
6656 @section @code{ld} and MSP430
6657 For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
6658 will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
6659 just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
6660
6661 @cindex MSP430 extra sections
6662 The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
6663
6664 @table @code
6665 @item @samp{.vectors}
6666 Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
6667
6668 @item @samp{.bootloader}
6669 Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
6670 in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6671
6672 @item @samp{.infomem}
6673 Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
6674 this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6675
6676 @item @samp{.infomemnobits}
6677 This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
6678 in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
6679
6680 @item @samp{.noinit}
6681 Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
6682
6683 The last two sections are used by gcc.
6684 @end table
6685
6686 @ifclear GENERIC
6687 @lowersections
6688 @end ifclear
6689 @end ifset
6690
6691 @ifset NDS32
6692 @ifclear GENERIC
6693 @raisesections
6694 @end ifclear
6695
6696 @node NDS32
6697 @section @code{ld} and NDS32
6698 @kindex relaxing on NDS32
6699 For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
6700 relaxes objects according to these options.
6701
6702 @table @code
6703 @item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
6704 Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
6705
6706 @item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
6707 Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
6708
6709 @item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
6710 Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
6711
6712 @item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
6713 Export the EX9 table after linking.
6714
6715 @item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
6716 Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
6717
6718 @item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
6719 Update the existing EX9 table.
6720
6721 @item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
6722 Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
6723
6724 @item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
6725 Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
6726
6727 @item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
6728 Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
6729
6730 @item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
6731 Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
6732 @end table
6733
6734 @ifclear GENERIC
6735 @lowersections
6736 @end ifclear
6737 @end ifset
6738
6739 @ifset POWERPC
6740 @ifclear GENERIC
6741 @raisesections
6742 @end ifclear
6743
6744 @node PowerPC ELF32
6745 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6746 @cindex PowerPC long branches
6747 @kindex --relax on PowerPC
6748 Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
6749 displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
6750 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6751 @samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
6752 the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
6753 section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
6754 section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
6755 @samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
6756 both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
6757 considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
6758
6759 @cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
6760 @table @option
6761 @cindex PowerPC PLT
6762 @kindex --bss-plt
6763 @item --bss-plt
6764 Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
6765 generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
6766 the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
6767 writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
6768 @command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
6769 PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
6770 compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
6771 BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
6772
6773 @kindex --secure-plt
6774 @item --secure-plt
6775 @command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
6776 @samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
6777 when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
6778 layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
6779 style BSS PLT.
6780
6781 @cindex PowerPC GOT
6782 @kindex --sdata-got
6783 @item --sdata-got
6784 The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
6785 sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
6786 @code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
6787 section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
6788 @code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
6789 @code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
6790 @samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
6791 @code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
6792 PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
6793 pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
6794 GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
6795 really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
6796
6797 @cindex PowerPC stub symbols
6798 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
6799 @item --emit-stub-syms
6800 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6801 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6802
6803 @cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
6804 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
6805 @item --no-tls-optimize
6806 PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6807 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6808 disable the optimization.
6809 @end table
6810
6811 @ifclear GENERIC
6812 @lowersections
6813 @end ifclear
6814 @end ifset
6815
6816 @ifset POWERPC64
6817 @ifclear GENERIC
6818 @raisesections
6819 @end ifclear
6820
6821 @node PowerPC64 ELF64
6822 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6823
6824 @cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
6825 @table @option
6826 @cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
6827 @kindex --stub-group-size
6828 @item --stub-group-size
6829 Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
6830 by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6831 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6832 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6833 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6834 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6835 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6836 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6837 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6838 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6839 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6840 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6841 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6842 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6843
6844 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6845 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6846 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6847 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6848
6849 @cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
6850 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
6851 @item --emit-stub-syms
6852 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6853 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6854
6855 @cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
6856 @kindex --dotsyms
6857 @kindex --no-dotsyms
6858 @item --dotsyms, --no-dotsyms
6859 These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
6860 in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
6861 function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
6862 code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
6863 properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
6864 to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
6865 @samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
6866 dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
6867 feature.
6868
6869 @cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
6870 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
6871 @item --no-tls-optimize
6872 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6873 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6874 disable the optimization.
6875
6876 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
6877 @kindex --no-opd-optimize
6878 @item --no-opd-optimize
6879 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
6880 corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
6881 the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
6882 Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
6883
6884 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
6885 @kindex --non-overlapping-opd
6886 @item --non-overlapping-opd
6887 Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
6888 @code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
6889 the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
6890 entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
6891
6892 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
6893 @kindex --no-toc-optimize
6894 @item --no-toc-optimize
6895 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
6896 entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
6897 reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
6898 marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
6899 marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
6900 relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
6901 unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
6902 reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
6903 discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
6904 reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
6905 code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
6906 optimization.
6907
6908 @cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
6909 @kindex --no-multi-toc
6910 @item --no-multi-toc
6911 If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
6912 @code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
6913 where TOC
6914 entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
6915 total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
6916 grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
6917 TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
6918 calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
6919 help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
6920 64K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
6921 Use this option to turn off this feature.
6922
6923 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
6924 @kindex --no-toc-sort
6925 @item --no-toc-sort
6926 By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
6927 happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
6928 placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
6929 with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
6930 referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
6931 @code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
6932 results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
6933 off this feature.
6934
6935 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
6936 @kindex --plt-align
6937 @kindex --no-plt-align
6938 @item --plt-align
6939 @itemx --no-plt-align
6940 Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
6941 aligned to a 32-byte boundary, or to the specified power of two
6942 boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. By default PLT call stubs
6943 are packed tightly.
6944
6945 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
6946 @kindex --plt-static-chain
6947 @kindex --no-plt-static-chain
6948 @item --plt-static-chain
6949 @itemx --no-plt-static-chain
6950 Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
6951 chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
6952 chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
6953
6954 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
6955 @kindex --plt-thread-safe
6956 @kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
6957 @item --plt-thread-safe
6958 @itemx --no-thread-safe
6959 With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
6960 lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
6961 another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
6962 order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
6963 memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
6964 barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
6965 looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
6966 seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
6967 default behaviour.
6968 @end table
6969
6970 @ifclear GENERIC
6971 @lowersections
6972 @end ifclear
6973 @end ifset
6974
6975 @ifset SPU
6976 @ifclear GENERIC
6977 @raisesections
6978 @end ifclear
6979
6980 @node SPU ELF
6981 @section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6982
6983 @cindex SPU ELF options
6984 @table @option
6985
6986 @cindex SPU plugins
6987 @kindex --plugin
6988 @item --plugin
6989 This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
6990
6991 @cindex SPU overlays
6992 @kindex --no-overlays
6993 @item --no-overlays
6994 Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
6995 regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
6996 @command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
6997 turns off all this special overlay handling.
6998
6999 @cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7000 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7001 @item --emit-stub-syms
7002 This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7003 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7004
7005 @cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7006 @kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7007 @item --extra-overlay-stubs
7008 This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7009 function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7010 on calls to non-overlay regions.
7011
7012 @cindex SPU local store size
7013 @kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7014 @item --local-store=lo:hi
7015 @command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7016 the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7017 range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7018
7019 @cindex SPU
7020 @kindex --stack-analysis
7021 @item --stack-analysis
7022 SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7023 unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7024 under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7025 @command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7026 @command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7027 determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7028 for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7029 for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7030 for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7031 find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7032 and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7033 under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7034 dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7035 is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7036 and calls will be given.
7037
7038 @cindex SPU
7039 @kindex --emit-stack-syms
7040 @item --emit-stack-syms
7041 This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7042 in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7043 These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7044 functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7045 functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7046 such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7047 The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
7048 @code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
7049 @end table
7050
7051 @ifclear GENERIC
7052 @lowersections
7053 @end ifclear
7054 @end ifset
7055
7056 @ifset TICOFF
7057 @ifclear GENERIC
7058 @raisesections
7059 @end ifclear
7060
7061 @node TI COFF
7062 @section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7063 @cindex TI COFF versions
7064 @kindex --format=@var{version}
7065 The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7066 TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7067 also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7068 format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7069 header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7070
7071 @ifclear GENERIC
7072 @lowersections
7073 @end ifclear
7074 @end ifset
7075
7076 @ifset WIN32
7077 @ifclear GENERIC
7078 @raisesections
7079 @end ifclear
7080
7081 @node WIN32
7082 @section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7083
7084 This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
7085 See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
7086 command line options mentioned here.
7087
7088 @table @emph
7089 @cindex import libraries
7090 @item import libraries
7091 The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
7092 libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
7093 regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7094 archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
7095 support for creating such libraries provided with the
7096 @samp{--out-implib} command line option.
7097
7098 @item exporting DLL symbols
7099 @cindex exporting DLL symbols
7100 The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7101
7102 @table @emph
7103 @item using auto-export functionality
7104 @cindex using auto-export functionality
7105 By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7106 which is controlled by the following command line options:
7107
7108 @itemize
7109 @item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7110 @item --exclude-symbols
7111 @item --exclude-libs
7112 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib
7113 @item --version-script
7114 @end itemize
7115
7116 When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7117 (global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7118 symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7119 often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7120 private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
7121 options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
7122 exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7123 final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7124
7125 If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
7126 command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7127 if either of the following are true:
7128
7129 @itemize
7130 @item A DEF file is used.
7131 @item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7132 @end itemize
7133
7134 @item using a DEF file
7135 @cindex using a DEF file
7136 Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7137 an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7138 exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7139 name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
7140 command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
7141
7142 @example
7143 gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7144 @end example
7145
7146 Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7147 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7148
7149 Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7150
7151 @example
7152 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
7153
7154 EXPORTS
7155 foo
7156 bar
7157 _bar = bar
7158 another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7159 var1 DATA
7160 doo = foo == foo2
7161 eoo DATA == var1
7162 @end example
7163
7164 This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
7165 symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7166 alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7167 by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7168 @code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7169 @code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7170 export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7171 in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7172 symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
7173
7174 The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7175 name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7176 the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7177
7178 When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7179 library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
7180 @code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
7181 executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
7182
7183 With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7184 specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
7185 non-default base address for the image.
7186
7187 If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
7188 or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7189 filename specified on the command line.
7190
7191 The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7192
7193 @example
7194 EXPORTS
7195 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7196 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7197 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
7198 @end example
7199
7200 Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7201 @samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7202 @samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7203 @samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7204 Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7205 @samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7206 string in import/export table for the symbol.
7207
7208 The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7209
7210 @code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7211 will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7212 by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7213 linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7214 library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7215
7216 @code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7217 The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7218 the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7219 @code{*_imp__foo}).
7220
7221 @code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7222 well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7223 read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7224 variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7225 the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7226 extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7227 application will behave unexpectedly.
7228
7229 @code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7230 it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7231 symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7232 API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7233 the DLL without an import library.
7234
7235 See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7236 other DEF file statements
7237
7238 @cindex creating a DEF file
7239 While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7240 with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
7241
7242 @item Using decorations
7243 @cindex Using decorations
7244 Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7245 itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7246 declared as:
7247
7248 @example
7249 __declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7250 __declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7251 @end example
7252
7253 All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7254 any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7255 this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7256 the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7257
7258 Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
7259 decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
7260 instead:
7261
7262 @example
7263 __declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7264 __declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7265 @end example
7266
7267 This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7268 when included by the library itself the header must declare the
7269 variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7270 code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
7271 of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
7272 omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7273 @samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
7274 information.
7275 @end table
7276
7277 @cindex automatic data imports
7278 @item automatic data imports
7279 The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
7280 by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
7281 compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
7282 issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
7283 code to these platforms, especially for large
7284 c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
7285 initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
7286 decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
7287 platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
7288 command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7289 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7290 suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7291 trigger the feature's use.
7292
7293 auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
7294 additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7295
7296 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
7297 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7298
7299 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7300 occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7301 One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
7302 below.
7303
7304 @cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
7305 For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7306 object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7307 offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7308 field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7309 in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
7310 without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
7311 The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
7312 references.
7313
7314 The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7315 be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7316 themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7317 runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7318 compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7319 support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
7320 run without error on an older system.
7321
7322 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7323 enabled as needed.
7324
7325 @cindex direct linking to a dll
7326 @item direct linking to a dll
7327 The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7328 including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
7329 libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
7330 traditional import library method, especially when linking large
7331 libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7332 function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7333 though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
7334 storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
7335 tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
7336 large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7337
7338 Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
7339 @samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
7340 of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
7341 perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7342 select the dll instead of an import library.
7343
7344
7345 For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7346 to find, in the first directory of its search path,
7347
7348 @example
7349 libxxx.dll.a
7350 xxx.dll.a
7351 libxxx.a
7352 xxx.lib
7353 cygxxx.dll (*)
7354 libxxx.dll
7355 xxx.dll
7356 @end example
7357
7358 before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7359
7360 (*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7361 where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7362 @samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7363 file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
7364 @samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7365
7366 Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7367 @samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
7368 was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7369 various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7370 could coexist on the same machine.
7371
7372 The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7373 applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
7374 libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
7375
7376 @example
7377 bin/
7378 cygxxx.dll
7379 lib/
7380 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
7381 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
7382 @end example
7383
7384 Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7385 done two ways:
7386
7387 1. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7388 @example
7389 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
7390 @end example
7391
7392 However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7393 (@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7394 @samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
7395 not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7396
7397 2. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7398 directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
7399 should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7400 making the app/dll.
7401
7402 @example
7403 ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
7404 @end example
7405
7406 Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7407
7408 @example
7409 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
7410 @end example
7411
7412 This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
7413 perfectly legal
7414
7415 @example
7416 bin/
7417 cygxxx-5.dll
7418 lib/
7419 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
7420 @end example
7421
7422 Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
7423 even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
7424 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
7425
7426 Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
7427 wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
7428
7429 1. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
7430 work with auto-imported data.
7431
7432 2. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
7433 import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
7434 symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
7435 for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
7436 possible to do this without an import lib.
7437
7438 3. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
7439 critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
7440 in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
7441 stdcall-decorated assembly names.
7442
7443 So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
7444 true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
7445 a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
7446 binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
7447 massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
7448 requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
7449 will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
7450
7451 @item symbol aliasing
7452 @table @emph
7453 @item adding additional names
7454 Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
7455 A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
7456 exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
7457 when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
7458 import library. Consider the following DEF file:
7459
7460 @example
7461 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7462
7463 EXPORTS
7464 foo
7465 _foo = foo
7466 @end example
7467
7468 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
7469
7470 Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
7471 source code using the "weak" attribute:
7472
7473 @example
7474 void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
7475 void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
7476 @end example
7477
7478 See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
7479 symbols.
7480
7481 @item renaming symbols
7482 Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
7483 kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
7484 @samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
7485 DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
7486 created). In the following example:
7487
7488 @example
7489 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7490
7491 EXPORTS
7492 _foo = foo
7493 @end example
7494
7495 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
7496 @samp{_foo}.
7497 @end table
7498
7499 Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
7500 unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
7501 If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
7502 @emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
7503 that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
7504 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
7505 renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
7506 to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
7507 the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
7508 In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
7509 which is probably not what you wanted.
7510
7511 @cindex weak externals
7512 @item weak externals
7513 The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
7514 weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
7515 defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
7516 are three variants of weak externals:
7517 @itemize
7518 @item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
7519 called lazy externals.
7520 @item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
7521 This form is not presently implemented.
7522 @item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
7523 implemented.
7524 @end itemize
7525 As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
7526 are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
7527 uses a default value.
7528
7529 @cindex aligned common symbols
7530 @item aligned common symbols
7531 As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
7532 desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
7533 the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
7534 carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
7535 by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
7536 tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
7537 but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
7538 warnings about unknown linker directives.
7539 @end table
7540
7541 @ifclear GENERIC
7542 @lowersections
7543 @end ifclear
7544 @end ifset
7545
7546 @ifset XTENSA
7547 @ifclear GENERIC
7548 @raisesections
7549 @end ifclear
7550
7551 @node Xtensa
7552 @section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
7553
7554 @cindex Xtensa processors
7555 The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
7556 @code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
7557 specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
7558 keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
7559 example, with the command:
7560
7561 @smallexample
7562 SECTIONS
7563 @{
7564 .text : @{
7565 *(.literal .text)
7566 @}
7567 @}
7568 @end smallexample
7569
7570 @noindent
7571 @command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
7572 and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
7573 literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
7574 interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
7575 group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
7576 files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
7577 and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
7578
7579 @cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
7580 @cindex relaxing on Xtensa
7581 Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
7582 provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
7583 is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
7584 literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
7585 will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
7586 location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
7587 the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
7588 unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
7589 @code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
7590 range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
7591
7592 For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
7593 to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
7594 instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
7595 instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
7596 instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
7597 @code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
7598 hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
7599 By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
7600 switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
7601 density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
7602 instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
7603 performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
7604 linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
7605 a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
7606
7607 The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
7608 control the linker:
7609
7610 @cindex Xtensa options
7611 @table @option
7612 @item --size-opt
7613 When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
7614 more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
7615 no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
7616 alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
7617 preserve the correctness of the code.
7618 @end table
7619
7620 @ifclear GENERIC
7621 @lowersections
7622 @end ifclear
7623 @end ifset
7624
7625 @ifclear SingleFormat
7626 @node BFD
7627 @chapter BFD
7628
7629 @cindex back end
7630 @cindex object file management
7631 @cindex object formats available
7632 @kindex objdump -i
7633 The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
7634 These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
7635 object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
7636 format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
7637 it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
7638 associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
7639 object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
7640 (@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
7641 list all the formats available for your configuration.
7642
7643 @cindex BFD requirements
7644 @cindex requirements for BFD
7645 As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
7646 several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
7647 BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
7648 formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
7649 been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
7650 BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
7651 may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
7652
7653 One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
7654 mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
7655 useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
7656 conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
7657
7658 @menu
7659 * BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
7660 @end menu
7661
7662 @node BFD outline
7663 @section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
7664 @cindex opening object files
7665 @include bfdsumm.texi
7666 @end ifclear
7667
7668 @node Reporting Bugs
7669 @chapter Reporting Bugs
7670 @cindex bugs in @command{ld}
7671 @cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
7672
7673 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
7674
7675 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
7676 it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
7677 to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
7678 work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
7679 @command{ld}.
7680
7681 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7682 information that enables us to fix the bug.
7683
7684 @menu
7685 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7686 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7687 @end menu
7688
7689 @node Bug Criteria
7690 @section Have You Found a Bug?
7691 @cindex bug criteria
7692
7693 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7694
7695 @itemize @bullet
7696 @cindex fatal signal
7697 @cindex linker crash
7698 @cindex crash of linker
7699 @item
7700 If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
7701 @command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
7702
7703 @cindex error on valid input
7704 @item
7705 If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
7706
7707 @cindex invalid input
7708 @item
7709 If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
7710 may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
7711 object files are correct.
7712
7713 @item
7714 If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
7715 improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
7716 @end itemize
7717
7718 @node Bug Reporting
7719 @section How to Report Bugs
7720 @cindex bug reports
7721 @cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
7722
7723 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
7724 products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
7725 recommend you contact that organization first.
7726
7727 You can find contact information for many support companies and
7728 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7729 distribution.
7730
7731 @ifset BUGURL
7732 Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
7733 @value{BUGURL}.
7734 @end ifset
7735
7736 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7737 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7738 fact or leave it out, state it!
7739
7740 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
7741 problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
7742 assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
7743 matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
7744 the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
7745 location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
7746 were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
7747 into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
7748 specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
7749 and the most helpful.
7750
7751 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
7752 the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
7753 on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
7754
7755 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
7756 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7757 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7758 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
7759
7760 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7761
7762 @itemize @bullet
7763 @item
7764 The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
7765 the @samp{--version} argument.
7766
7767 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
7768 the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
7769
7770 @item
7771 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
7772 patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
7773
7774 @item
7775 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7776 version number.
7777
7778 @item
7779 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
7780 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7781
7782 @item
7783 The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
7784 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
7785 list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
7786 sufficient.
7787
7788 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7789 and then we might not encounter the bug.
7790
7791 @item
7792 A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
7793 bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
7794 provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
7795 bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
7796 state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
7797 requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
7798 we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
7799 attachments are best.
7800
7801 If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
7802 @code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
7803 object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
7804 @code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
7805 how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
7806
7807 @item
7808 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7809 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7810
7811 Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
7812 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
7813 not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
7814 a chance to make a mistake.
7815
7816 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
7817 say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
7818 copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
7819 C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
7820 and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
7821 fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
7822 you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
7823 any conclusion from our observations.
7824
7825 @item
7826 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
7827 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
7828 @samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
7829 If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
7830 context, not by line number.
7831
7832 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7833 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7834 @end itemize
7835
7836 Here are some things that are not necessary:
7837
7838 @itemize @bullet
7839 @item
7840 A description of the envelope of the bug.
7841
7842 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7843 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7844 changes will not affect it.
7845
7846 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7847 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7848 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7849 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7850
7851 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7852 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7853 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7854 less time, and so on.
7855
7856 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7857 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7858
7859 @item
7860 A patch for the bug.
7861
7862 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7863 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7864 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7865 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7866
7867 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
7868 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
7869 through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
7870 able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
7871 fixed.
7872
7873 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7874 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7875 help us to understand.
7876
7877 @item
7878 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7879
7880 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
7881 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7882 @end itemize
7883
7884 @node MRI
7885 @appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
7886 @cindex MRI compatibility
7887 To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
7888 linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
7889 alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
7890 described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
7891 simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
7892 @command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
7893 linker commands; these commands are described here.
7894
7895 In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
7896 file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
7897 features to make use of them.
7898
7899 You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
7900 @samp{-c} command-line option.
7901
7902 Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
7903 command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
7904 blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
7905 MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
7906 issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
7907
7908 Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
7909
7910 You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
7911 lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
7912 The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
7913
7914 @table @code
7915 @cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
7916 @item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
7917 @itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
7918 Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
7919 the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
7920 @code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
7921 your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
7922 script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
7923 commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
7924 input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
7925 @code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
7926
7927 @cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
7928 @item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
7929 Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
7930 in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
7931
7932 @var{in-secname} may be an integer.
7933
7934 @cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
7935 @item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
7936 Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
7937 @var{expression} should be a power of two.
7938
7939 @cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
7940 @item BASE @var{expression}
7941 Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
7942 absolute addresses) in the output file.
7943
7944 @cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
7945 @item CHIP @var{expression}
7946 @itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
7947 This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
7948
7949 @cindex @code{END} (MRI)
7950 @item END
7951 This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
7952
7953 @cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
7954 @item FORMAT @var{output-format}
7955 Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
7956 language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
7957
7958 @enumerate
7959 @item
7960 S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
7961
7962 @item
7963 IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
7964
7965 @item
7966 COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
7967 @samp{COFF}
7968 @end enumerate
7969
7970 @cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
7971 @item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
7972 Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
7973 @command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
7974
7975 The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
7976 same line, with no change in its effect.
7977
7978 @cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
7979 @item LOAD @var{filename}
7980 @itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
7981 Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
7982 same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
7983 command line.
7984
7985 @cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
7986 @item NAME @var{output-name}
7987 @var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
7988 MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
7989 option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
7990
7991 @cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
7992 @item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
7993 @itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
7994 Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
7995 order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
7996 script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
7997 sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
7998 file, in the order specified.
7999
8000 @cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8001 @item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8002 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8003 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8004 Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8005 @var{name} used in the linker input files.
8006
8007 @cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8008 @item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8009 @itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8010 @itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8011 You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8012 specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8013 If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8014 @var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8015 @end table
8016
8017 @node GNU Free Documentation License
8018 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
8019 @include fdl.texi
8020
8021 @node LD Index
8022 @unnumbered LD Index
8023
8024 @printindex cp
8025
8026 @tex
8027 % I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
8028 % meantime:
8029 \long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8030 \centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8031 \centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8032 \centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8033 \centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8034 \centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8035 \centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8036 \centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8037 \page\colophon
8038 % Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
8039 @end tex
8040
8041 @bye
This page took 0.234471 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.